JP2019047970A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of heightening appealing force to a player by showing a game area in a size larger than actual one.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 1 includes a transparent frame-shaped front constituent member 1000 partitioning the outer periphery of a game area 5a where a game ball is placed to start a game by operation by a player, and a rear front left decorative body 3030 in a back unit 3000 extending from the game area 5a inside to the game area 5a outside in a front view, provided on the posterior side to the front constituent member 1000, and having a front surface to which ornament is applied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 135

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  A game machine such as a pachinko machine is made capable of receiving a game medium in a game area, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area, and a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area. Have a receiving port (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, role winning opening), V winning opening, etc.), and gaming media can be accepted at the receiving opening. Since the player is given a benefit (a payout of gaming media, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage such as opening / closing operation of a variable winning opening, etc.), It is possible to entertain the game medium's typing operation so that it can be received to the desired receiving port.

  In this type of gaming machine, a frame-shaped front component that divides the outer periphery of the gaming area is provided (for example, Patent Document 1). In the technology of Patent Document 1, the front component is formed in an opaque black color so as to be inconspicuous when assembled into a game machine.

  However, in the prior art such as Patent Document 1, since the outside of the game area is surrounded by the black front component, the front component can be seen from the front (player's side) when assembled into a game machine In this case, the black front component causes the game area to appear narrow, which reduces the appeal of the player.

JP, 2013-59434, A

  Therefore, in view of the above-described circumstances, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of showing the gaming area large and enhancing the appeal of the player.

Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A transparent frame-shaped front component defining the outer periphery of the game area,
And a decorative body provided on the rear side of the front component and extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area, as viewed from the front.

  Here, as the "gaming area", "a game medium is driven in by the operation of the player, and has a plurality of receptacles to which a benefit including a payout of the game medium is provided according to the reception of the game medium. Each of the areas is provided with a plurality of symbols, and the game is started according to the combination of the symbols stopped by the player's stop operation while each is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium. An area where a plurality of torsos to which a benefit including a medium payout is provided is disposed, and the like.

  Moreover, as a "decoration body", "a thing having a two-dimensional decoration", a "thing having a three-dimensional decoration", etc. are mentioned. As "decoration" of the decorative body, "pattern along the concept of the gaming machine", "imitation of the character along the concept to the gaming machine", "imitation of the item along the concept of the gaming machine", "The imitation of the logo in line with the gaming machine concept", "the imitation of the background in line with the gaming machine concept", etc. may be mentioned. The "decorative body" may be opaque or transparent.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is provided on the transparent frame-shaped front component defining the outer periphery of the game area and on the rear side of the front component, and the front view shows the game area from within the game area And a decorative body extending to the outside.

  As a result, the front component defining the outer periphery of the game area is made transparent, and the decorative body provided on the rear side is extended to the outside of the game area, so it extends to the outside of the game area By looking at the decorative body, the size of the game area can be made larger than the actual size. Therefore, by making the game area look larger than that of the conventional game machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in this game machine and to play the game machine As this, it is possible to make it easy to select this gaming machine, and it is possible to make the gaming machine capable of enhancing the appeal of the player.

  In addition, since the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area divided by the front component becomes difficult to understand because the front component is transparent, giving an open feeling by making it look that the outer periphery of the game area is not partitioned. Even if the game area is the same size as a conventional game machine, the game area can be made larger.

  Furthermore, since the front component members are transparent, the light from the illumination in the game hall where the game machine is installed and the light from the light emitting means (for example, LED) provided in the game machine are transmitted or reflected. It becomes possible to make it be refracted or diffused, and it can appear as if the front component is emitting light, and the appearance of the whole gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, since a decorative body extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area in a front view is provided on the rear side of the transparent front component, a member (for example, a functional component) provided backward by the decorative body (For example, motor, solenoid, gear, cam member, link member, wiring, LED board on which LED is mounted, relay board relaying connection between boards, etc.) can be hidden, so The appearance of the player can be prevented from being deteriorated by the player's viewing from the player side, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved.

  A transparent flat game panel may be further provided which is provided between the front component and the decorative body and closes the frame of the front component. Thereby, in the front view, the portion extending out of the game area in the decorative body can be visually recognized through the transparent front component and the transparent game panel, so that the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited. it can.

  In addition, when the inside of the frame of the front component defining the outer periphery of the game area is closed from behind by the transparent game panel, the game area is located on the front side of the game panel, so the decorative body Is provided behind the game area. Therefore, in the front view, the inside and outside of the game area can be decorated from the back by the decorative body extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area, and the same effects as those described above can be exhibited. In this case, the decorative body does not get in the way, and it is possible to smoothly enjoy the game in the game area and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, after the mechanical component provided behind the decorative body is further provided, the decorative body may be extended so as to cover at least a part of the front of the functional component. Thereby, in the front view, at least a part of the functional parts can be covered and concealed by the decorative body extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area, so the player can pass through the transparent front component and the game area The functional parts can be made less visible from the side, and the appearance of the whole gaming machine can be suppressed from being deteriorated, and the decorative body on the front side can be seen instead of the functional parts to make the whole appearance of the whole gaming machine good. It is possible to make the gaming machine capable of raising the appeal of the player.

  In addition, a functional part is provided in a rendering device capable of performing a predetermined effect by moving the movable body, and as the rendering device, a retracted position at which the movable body overlaps with the decorative body in front view, and an appearance position at which the decorative body does not overlap In the state of the retracted position, the decorative body can not make the movable body visible. When the movable body is moved from the retracted position to the emerging position, the movable body can be seen. Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player by the appearance of the movable body, and it is possible to make the player have an expectation of the game with an expectation of something good.

  Furthermore, as described above, when at least a part of the functional part is covered with the decorative body, depending on the functional part, it is difficult to recognize that it is a functional part by covering to some extent without covering the whole. It looks like a part of Therefore, even if the decorative body is not sized to cover the entire functional component, it is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above. I can show it.

  Further, as described above, in the case where the functional parts are provided, it is desirable that at least a part of the functional parts be disposed outside the game area in a front view. As a result, at least a part of the functional components is arranged outside the gaming area in front view, so that the space between the front component and the outer periphery of the gaming area is not increased in order to arrange the functional components. Even in this case, the functional parts can be arranged, and by balancing the arrangement of the functional parts, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the space of the game area. In other words, since a part of the functional components are arranged in the game area in front view, it is possible to reduce the space between the front component and the outer periphery of the game area, and relatively The space of the game area can be increased, and a gaming machine capable of further exhibiting the above-described effects can be provided.

  Further, as described above, in the case where the functional component is provided, it is desirable that the decorative body cover at least a portion in the game area in front of the functional component. This makes it possible to prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area by the decorative body, so that the appearance in the game area can be improved, and in addition to the same effects as described above, Even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see.

  Furthermore, the decoration may have a continuous decoration over the entire surface. Thereby, in the front view, since the decoration of the decoration extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area is continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration makes it difficult to recognize the outer periphery of the game area While being able to give an open feeling, the size of the game area can be made to appear larger than the actual size, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body, making the gaming machine stand out for the player Appeal can be enhanced.

  Further, the decorative body may be formed to be opaque. As a result, since the decorative body is made opaque, it is possible to prevent the member provided on the back side from being seen through the decorative body, and the member is seen from the player side through the front component member so that the appearance is bad. Can be prevented, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, it is desirable that the decoration of the decoration is a decoration associated with the decoration (design) in the game area in front view. Thereby, the design in the game area can be extended to the outside of the game area by the decorative body extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area, so that the game area can be made larger than it actually is. It can be a gaming machine that can be strongly attracted.

  Furthermore, a frame-shaped door frame having a door window closed by a transparent glass plate partitioning the front of the game area and having an opening larger than the game area, and closing the game area openably from the front, Further, the decorative body may be extended to the outside of the door window in a front view after being provided. As a result, the member behind the decorative body can be hidden from view in the door window, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved. In addition, when the above-mentioned functional component is arranged so that a part may be outside the door window, it is desirable to extend the decorative body to such an extent that the part inside the door window in the functional component is hidden. Even if the entire part is not covered, the uncovered part can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame, so that the decoration can be prevented from becoming longer than necessary, and it is possible to make the decoration (game machine) Such cost can be reduced.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"A transparent flat game panel provided between the front component and the decorative body and closing the frame of the front component,
Furthermore, it is characterized by being "provided".

  Here, as the "game panel", "acrylic resin plate", "polycarbonate resin plate", "ABS resin plate", "polypropylene plate", "polyarylate resin plate", "methacrylic resin plate", "glass plate" , Etc. In addition, as “the game panel”, “the one formed of a single plate material”, “the transparent plate-shaped panel plate on which the game area is formed on the front side, and the transparent panel holder for holding the outer periphery of the panel plate And the like, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the gaming machine is further provided with a transparent flat game panel provided between the front component and the decoration and closing the frame of the front component. is there.

  Thereby, in the front view, the portion extending out of the game area in the decorative body can be visually recognized through the transparent front component and the transparent game panel, so that the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited. it can.

  In addition, since the inside of the frame of the front component defining the outer periphery of the game area is closed from behind by the transparent game panel, the game area is positioned on the front side of the game panel, so the decorative body Is provided behind the game area. Therefore, in the front view, the inside and outside of the game area can be decorated from the back by the decorative body extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area, and the same effects as those described above can be exhibited. In this case, the decorative body does not get in the way, and it is possible to smoothly enjoy the game in the game area and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 3: In the structure of means 1 or 2,
"The mechanical parts provided behind the decorative body,
Further equipped,
The decorative body is
It extends to cover at least a portion of the front of the functional component "
It is characterized by being.

  Here, as the “functional components”, “motor”, “solenoid”, “gear”, “cam member”, “link member”, “spring”, “shaft”, “guide rail”, “detection sensor”, Examples include "metal reinforcing plate", "substrate", "wiring", "connector" and the like.

  In addition, as "functional components", "provided in a rendering device provided with a movable body capable of a predetermined movement", "provided in a rendering device provided with a light emitting decoration capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode What is "provided in a rendering device provided with a light guide plate capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined pattern", and "provided in a rendering device provided with a display device capable of displaying a predetermined moving image "," An inlet unit (for example, an attacker unit having an adjustable opening (for example, a variable start opening, a big winning opening, a prize winning opening, etc.) for opening and closing game media circulating in the game area And the like, “a device provided in a sorting apparatus for distributing the flow path of game media circulating in the game area”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the gaming machine is further provided with a mechanical component provided on the rear side of the decorative body, and then the decorative body is to cover at least a part of the front of the functional component. It is intended to be extended.

  Thereby, in the front view, at least a part of the functional parts can be covered and concealed by the decorative body extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area, so the player can pass through the transparent front component and the game area The functional parts can be made less visible from the side, and the appearance of the whole gaming machine can be suppressed from being deteriorated, and the decorative body on the front side can be seen instead of the functional parts to make the whole appearance of the whole gaming machine good. It is possible to make the gaming machine capable of raising the appeal of the player.

  In addition, when the functional parts are provided in a rendering device capable of executing a predetermined rendering, the player can be entertained by showing the rendering by the rendering device to the player, and the player can It is possible to suppress the decline in interest for the game of For example, in the case where the movable body moves between the retracted position where the movable body overlaps with the decorative body in the front view and the appearance position where the movable body does not overlap the decorative body in the front view, the movable body is moved by the decorative body in the retracted position. Since the movable body can be seen when the movable body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the player can be surprised by the appearance of the movable body, and the player can be surprised. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by making it think that there is something good.

  Furthermore, since at least a part of the functional component is covered with the decorative body, depending on the functional component, it is difficult to recognize that it is a functional component by covering the functional component to some extent without covering the functional component. It can look like Therefore, even if the decorative body is not sized to cover the entire functional component, it is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above. I can show it.

Means 4: In the structure of means 3,
"The functional parts are
In a front view, at least a portion is disposed outside the game area "
It is characterized by being.

  By the way, when trying to provide the whole of a plurality of functional parts outside the game area in a front view, it is necessary to increase the space between the front component and the outer periphery of the game area. Since the size of the outer periphery of the member) is limited, there is a problem that the space of the game area is relatively reduced by an amount corresponding to the increase of the space.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, at least a part of the functional components is arranged outside the game area in a front view.

  As a result, at least a part of the functional components is arranged outside the gaming area in front view, so that the space between the front component and the outer periphery of the gaming area is not increased in order to arrange the functional components. Even in this case, the functional parts can be arranged, and by balancing the arrangement of the functional parts, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the space of the game area. In other words, since a part of the functional components are arranged in the game area in front view, it is possible to reduce the space between the front component and the outer periphery of the game area, and relatively The space of the game area can be increased, and a gaming machine capable of further exhibiting the above-described effects can be provided.

  In addition, when the outer shape of the front component is made square and the outer peripheral shape of the game area is made circular, the space between the outer periphery of the game area becomes wider at the four corners of the front component, so All of the functional components may be arranged in Thereby, in front view, by locating all of the functional components outside the game area, it is easy to secure an arrangement space for the movable body etc. in the game area, and the movable body etc. is relatively enlarged. Can. Therefore, it is possible to provide a rendering device with a higher rendering effect, and a gaming machine capable of sufficiently entertaining the player.

In the configuration of the means 5: the means 3 or the means 4,
"The decoration is
Cover at least a portion in the game area in front of the functional component
It is characterized by being.

  By the way, when at least a part of the front of the functional component is covered by the decorative body, the functional component can not be seen through the transparent front component when only the part outside the game area is covered in front view However, since the functional parts are visible from within the game area, the appearance of the game area may be degraded.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the decorative body is characterized in that it covers at least a portion in front of the functional component within the game area.

  This makes it possible to prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area by the decorative body, so that the appearance in the game area can be improved, and in addition to the same effects as described above, Even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see.

Means 6: In any one of the means 1 to 5,
"The decoration has a continuous decoration over the entire surface"
It is characterized by being.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the decoration has a continuous decoration over the entire surface.

  Thereby, in the front view, since the decoration of the decoration extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area is continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration makes it difficult to recognize the outer periphery of the game area While being able to give an open feeling, the size of the game area can be made to appear larger than the actual size, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body, making the gaming machine stand out for the player Appeal can be enhanced.

Means 7: in any one of the means 1 to 6
"The decoration is made opaque"
It is characterized by being.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the decorative body is formed to be opaque.

  As a result, since the decorative body is made opaque, it is possible to prevent the member provided on the back side from being seen through the decorative body, and the member is seen from the player side through the front component member so that the appearance is bad. Can be prevented, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Note that the decorative body may be translucent and opaque. Accordingly, when light such as a light emitting means (for example, an LED) provided on the rear side of the decorative body is irradiated, the decorative body emits light and is decorated brightly, and the decorative effect by the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Means 8: in a gaming machine
"A transparent frame-shaped front component defining the outer periphery of the game area,
A transparent flat game panel provided on the rear side of the front component and closing the inside of the frame of the front component;
Functional components provided behind the gaming panel, at least a part of which are disposed outside the gaming area in front view,
It is provided between the functional component and the gaming panel, and extends from inside the gaming area to outside the gaming area so as to cover at least a portion within the gaming area in front of the functional component in front view It is characterized in that it is "having an opaque body and a decorative body having a continuous decoration over the entire surface."

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the gaming machine is provided with the transparent frame-shaped front component defining the outer periphery of the game area and the rear side of the front component, closing the frame of the front component A transparent flat game panel and a rear side of the game panel, at least a part of which is provided between a functional part arranged outside the game area in front view, a functional part and the game panel, A decorative body which extends from inside the game area to the outside of the game area so as to cover at least a part inside the game area in front of the functional part in a front view and is opaque and has a continuous decoration over the entire surface; Is provided.

  Thus, the frame-shaped front component defining the outer periphery of the game area and the flat game panel closing the frame of the front component from the rear side are respectively made transparent, and the game panel The functional components on the rear side are arranged so that a part is outside the game area in front view, and at least a part of the functional area in the game area is covered between the game panel and the functional components. By providing the decorative body extending from the inside of the area to the outside of the game area, it is possible to cover and hide at least a part of the functional components by the decoration and pass through the transparent front component and the game panel and the game area. As a result, it is possible to make the functional parts inconspicuous from the player side, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of the entire gaming machine from being deteriorated, and also to see the decorative body on the front side instead of the functional parts. You see Can improve the example, may be a game machine is increased appeal against the player.

  In addition, since the front component and the game panel are transparent, it is difficult to understand the boundary of the game area divided by the front component and the game panel, so that the outer periphery of the game area does not appear to be divided. A feeling can be given, and even if the gaming area is the same size as a conventional gaming machine, the gaming area can be made larger. Therefore, by making the game area look larger than that of the conventional game machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in this game machine and to play the game machine As this, it is possible to make it easy to select this gaming machine, and it is possible to make the gaming machine capable of enhancing the appeal of the player.

  Further, since the decorative body covers at least a portion in the game area in front of the functional parts, the decorative body can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area, so In addition to the above-mentioned effects, the functional parts can be made difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area.

  Furthermore, the decoration has a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and the decoration of the decorative extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area is continuous over the entire surface in a front view. The continuous decoration can make it hard to understand the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area, and can give the feeling of opening to make the size of the game area appear larger than the actual size, and the decoration of the decoration makes the game machine's The appearance can be improved, and the gaming machine can be highlighted to further enhance the appeal to the player.

  Further, since the decorative body is made opaque, it is possible to prevent the member provided on the rear side from being seen through the decorative body, and the appearance is deteriorated because the member is seen from the player side through the front component member. Can prevent the appearance of the gaming machine.

  In addition, since at least a part of the functional parts is arranged outside the game area in front view, the space between the front component and the outer periphery of the game area is not enlarged in order to arrange the functional parts. Also, the functional parts can be arranged, and by balancing the arrangement of the functional parts, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the space of the game area. In other words, since a part of the functional components are arranged in the game area in front view, it is possible to reduce the space between the front component and the outer periphery of the game area, and relatively The space of the game area can be increased, and a gaming machine capable of further exhibiting the above-described effects can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the front component and the game panel are transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where this game machine is installed and the light from the light emitting means (for example, LED) provided in the game machine are transmitted. It becomes possible to make it reflect, reflect, refract and diffuse, and it can appear as if the front component and the game panel are emitting light, and the appearance of the whole gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, since at least a part of the functional component is covered with the decorative body, depending on the functional component, it is difficult to recognize that it is a functional component by covering the functional component to some extent without covering the functional component. It can look like Therefore, even if the decorative body is not sized to cover the entire functional component, it is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above. I can show it.

  In addition, since the inside of the frame of the front component defining the outer periphery of the game area is closed from behind by the transparent game panel, and the game area is located on the front side of the game panel, the decorative body Is provided behind the game area. Therefore, in the front view, the inside and outside of the game area can be decorated from the back by the decorative body extending from the inside of the game area to the outside of the game area, and the same effects as those described above can be exhibited. In this case, the decorative body does not get in the way, and it is possible to smoothly enjoy the game in the game area and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 9: in any one of the means 1 to the means 8,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of receptacles arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
The pachinko machine according to the present invention is a pachinko machine including a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of gaming media in response to the reception of gaming media to the receiving port.

  Here, as the "receiving port", "a general winning opening that is always open in the gaming area", "an opening that is always open in the gaming area, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by receiving the game medium. In the game area, the start winning opening (starting opening) where the special lottery whether or not to generate a game is performed, and the fact that the game medium is received in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area Regular lottery that is selected by game media passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium is a variable winning opening (a variable start opening, a prize winning opening, etc.) that can accept game media, and a "specified area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area" Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by doing, it is possible to receive the game media, the variable start winning where special lottery whether or not to generate the advantageous game state where the player becomes advantageous by acceptance of the game media is done "A variable start-up opening", "V-prize-out opening for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium received in the prize-winning opening is distributed and accepted by the allocating means", As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are a special winning opening and a winning feature winning opening which can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to receive game media.

  In addition, as the "pachinko machine", "lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by the reception of the game medium to the start opening, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner after being displayed in a stopped manner, and the special lottery result display means for drawing the special lottery result by drawing by the combination of the special symbols displayed for the stop and the special lottery result display means One that includes advantageous gaming state generating means for causing an advantageous gaming state to be generated by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when the special lottery result to be generated is displayed ("so-called digipachi machine") The distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern when the game medium is received by the V prize opening A game provided with an advantageous gaming state generation means for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (a so-called honeymoon machine), "having a large winning opening and a prize winning opening, gaming media to the starting opening The special prize opening or the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the prize winning opening when the gaming medium accepted in the prize winning opening is distributed to the V prize opening Or, those equipped with advantageous gaming state generation means (so-called, multi-function device) etc. which generate an advantageous gaming state which makes the player advantageous by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in the gaming area, and a receiving port capable of receiving game media, and a payout for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of game media to the receiving port. A pachinko machine provided with an apparatus. As a result, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to achieve the operation and effect of any of the means described above.

Means 10: in any one of the means 1 to the means 8,
The gaming machine is
Multiple torso, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit that causes the plurality of the torso bodies to rotate, respectively, by the player operating after the game medium is inserted;
A plurality of stop operation units for rotating and stopping the plurality of the torso respectively;
A slot machine comprising: a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of gaming media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating a plurality of the stop operation units It is characterized by

  Here, as the "slot machine", "the number of effective lines to determine the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game", "a plurality of times of the trunk The internal lottery is executed with the start of the rotation, and the player gives a benefit according to the combination of the stop symbols and the lottery result of the internal lottery, "the effective line for determining the combination of the stop symbols is fixed And the like. In addition, as "Privileges", "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", "Assist Time ( AT), etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the start operation unit for rotating the plurality of torso by operating the gaming machine with the plurality of torso each having the plurality of symbols and the game medium after the game medium is inserted. , And a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of turning bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all the turning bodies stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units. A slot machine including a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of game media. As a result, in the pachislot machine, it is possible to achieve the operation and effect of any of the means described above.

Means 11: in any one of the means 1 to the means 8,
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, the “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused is a series of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of the start operation unit (for example, operation lever) after inserting a plurality of game media. Is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and then, the fluctuation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbol, , Advantageous game state) is given. In addition, when the stop operation unit is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variation display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the predetermined time having elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine is a fusion machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Thereby, in the compound machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the operation effect of any of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of showing the gaming area large and enhancing the appeal of the player.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of a pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position from the right front. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and was seen from the front upper, and (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and seen from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled a handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer base unit in a saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in a saucer unit from the direction of movement of a production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation button unit and was seen from the front lower. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a rotational drive unit in the left view of a production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board | substrate in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, (c) is a central pressing operation section of the pressing operation section It is a front view of a plate unit when pressing. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit into every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the back sectional view which cut the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the front-back direction center of a delivery blade. (A) is a back sectional view which cut a dispensing device in the front-back direction center of a dispensing blade, when a ball extraction movable piece is an open state, (b) is a sectional view cut by the AA line in (a) . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine which was cut at the center in the lateral direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows upper part in the perspective view which looked at a main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. in the ball | bowl tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled FIG. 101 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball which overflowed from the ball | bowl tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in a main body frame upper part. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is the front view of the game board which made the front component, a game panel, and a front unit etc. opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board of the state which made the front component, the game panel, and the front unit etc transparent. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board into every main member and was seen from back. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 107 taken along the line C-C. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front unit is cut in parallel with the face of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel in the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit and side unit in the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit and side unit in the front unit from the back, (c) is It is a left side view of a starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front of a general winning a prize opening, and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning a prize opening at the time of an open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the site | part of the starting opening unit and side unit in a game board. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st attacker unit in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st attacker unit in the front unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the 1st big winning a prize opening door in a 1st attacker unit from a left side. It is an explanatory view showing the passage of the game ball in the first attacker unit in section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center character of the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center character of the front unit from the back. It is a front view of a center character. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attachment unit in the front unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member from the front, (b) is the 2nd attachment unit in the front unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member Is a perspective view seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the passage of the game ball in the second attack unit and the unit in the side right middle in cross section. FIG. 115 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged right portion in the game area in FIG. 115; It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit by main structure, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which expands and shows the upper left corner of a game board in the state which made the door frame transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back induction unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back induction unit in the back unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back production unit and was seen from back. It is an explanatory view showing the movable composition of a back-rear effect unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back and forth effect unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back down left production unit and back down right production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) sees the back down left production unit and back down right production unit in the back unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back down left rendering unit and the back down right rendering unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back down left rendering unit and the back down right rendering unit, and was seen from back. It is an explanatory view showing the movable composition of a back down left production unit and a back down right production unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom inside production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom inside effect unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back-bottom middle raising and lowering mechanism of a back-to-back middle effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back-bottom middle raising and lowering mechanism of a back-to-back middle effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back and bottom inside decoration unit of a back and bottom production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back and bottom inside decoration unit of a back and bottom production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows raising / lowering of a back-and-front inside decoration unit by the back-and-front middle raising and lowering mechanism in a back-and-front inside production | presentation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure concerning rotation of the rotation decoration of the back bottom of the back decoration in the back bottom middle rendering unit from the front, (b) is the stop position of the rotation bottom of the back decoration middle. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between and each detection sensor by a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement | positioning of LED of the back decoration in a back decoration production unit from a front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back up production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back up production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back-up production unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back-up production unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up raising / lowering decoration unit in a back up rendering unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up raising / lowering decoration unit in a back unit, and was seen from back. It is an explanatory view showing the rotation mechanism of the back up front rotation decoration in the back up rendering unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of the back up raising / lowering decoration unit in a back up rendering unit from the front, (b) is a back raising raising decoration in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decoration unit to the appearance position It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a body unit, and the rotation mechanism of back-up back rotation ornamentation body from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a decoration board | substrate from a front in the state which moved the back up raising / lowering decoration body unit to the appearance position in the back up rendering unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back production left production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back production left production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back production left production | production unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back production left production unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration left decoration body unit of the back preparation left production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration left decoration body unit of the back preparation left production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is an explanatory view showing a movable mechanism of a back rear left production unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back decoration left decoration unit in a back decoration left production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back rear right production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back right production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back production right production unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back production right production unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back decoration right decoration unit from the back rear right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration right decoration unit from the back rear right production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is an explanatory view showing a movable mechanism of a back rear right production unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back decoration right decoration unit in a back decoration right production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front left production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front left production unit in the back unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled one back front left decoration unit in back front left production units, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled one back front left decoration unit in back front left production | presentation units, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing a shutter group in a closed state in a back front left rendering unit, (b) is a front view showing a shutter group in an open state in the back front left rendering unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front right production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front right production unit in the back unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled one back front right decoration unit in back front right production units, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled one back front right decoration unit in back front right production units, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in a closed state in the back front right rendering unit, (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in an open state in the back front right rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the movable decorative body from the retracted position to the appearance position from the retracted position to the back position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the rotation decoration body from the lower position to the upper position from the lower position to the upper position. Back-to-back back-to-back rotating decorative body from retracted position to appearance position, back-to-back left to back rendering left-to-back rotating body from back position to first appearance position, back-to-back back to right rendering unit It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decorative body being moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. A state in which the back rotation left rotating decoration is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back rotation right rotating decoration from the back position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of a game board which makes a shutter unit of back front left production unit, and a shutter unit of back front right production unit change from a closed state to an open state, respectively. Back to the rear back movable decorative body from the retreat position to the appearance position, back to the back rear effect unit from the back to the back rotation decorative body from the retraction position to the appearance position, back back left production unit back to the left rotation decoration From the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decoration body from the back position to the first appearance position, and the back rotating middle of the rendering unit back up from the lowered position It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved to the position. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position from the right front is there. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 90) is inserted.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 Attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame upper member 30, the lower end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20; An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the main body The frame lower hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be able to open and close in a forward direction centering on the left side in a front view.

  In the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to partially cover the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-reversed and radiated forward to allow the player to hear a more deep bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained also by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2. The main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner, the main frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and the game The ball launch device 540 for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, the payout base unit 550 which receives the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the game received by the payout base unit 550 A game unit attached to a main unit frame base 501, a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 having a power supply substrate 630 and a payout control substrate 633, and A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the top and bottom of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so as to close the opened front side. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square in a front view, It is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emission effects according to the game state.

  In the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails which are in contact with the gaming ball B and are installed in a predetermined gauge array, and a predetermined benefit for the player by receiving or passing the gaming ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005, and a second large winning opening 2006 And. The obstacle nail N is implanted on the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  The player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, the second large winning opening 2006 etc. The player can enjoy the operation of hitting the handle 182 as accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state which changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the back effect unit 3100, the back down Left production unit 3200, back down right production unit 3250, back down inside production unit 3300, back up production unit 3400, back back left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production A player can be entertained by causing a light emission effect or a movable effect to be performed by the unit 3800 or the like.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of a pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically.

  The outer frame 2 is, as shown in the figure, separated from the left and right and extending vertically, the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. Outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends, outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20, and upper surface of outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-reversed and emitted forward.

  The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 of the outer frame 2. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable to the front centering on the left side in a front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend in the vertical direction, and are disposed apart from each other in the left and right direction. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially rotatably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 has an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And the lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame left member 11 is a portion from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a which is recessed to the right in a flat shape in the rear side portion of the left side in the front-rear direction divided into three, and the right side from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a The bulging part 11b bulging toward the direction and the hollow part 11c which penetrates the bulging part 11b up and down are provided. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 11c.

  Moreover, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed to be symmetrical with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b at the left side of 12a is provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a of the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally and a flat upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat contact portion 13d which extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and brings the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hooking member 25 attached to a lower portion of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame right member 21 is provided with a recess 21a recessed leftwardly in a flat shape at the rear side of the right and left sides of the right and left sides from the front and back, and a left side from the side opposite to the recess 21a in the left side A bulging portion 21 b bulging in the direction, and a hollow portion 21 c penetrating the bulging portion 21 b up and down are provided. The outer frame right member 21 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the recessed portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 21c.

  Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side is formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side is formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the right side 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and further front side And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the lower surface of the right end of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout 30a of the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b And a flat contact portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21 By screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state in which the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut the upper surface of the right end of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout 41a of the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are members to which an outer frame collar 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later is hooked. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically from the front side of the mounting portion 24a to a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21 And a flat plate-like locking piece portion 24b on which the outer frame collar 653 at the upper side is locked.

  The lower hooking member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left from a flat mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 The flat-plate shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame collar 653 is locked and the insertion through which the lower outer frame collar 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction It is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a which is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

  Moreover, the outer frame upper member 30 is provided with the attachment step part 30b in which the upper surface and front surface were recessed rather than the general surface in the left side edge part. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 spaced apart to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right, and extends in the left and right direction; A box-shaped front curtain member 42 which is disposed forward of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain member 42 And a box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extending forwardly open, and a ball biting prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a which is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and is provided with a recess 41 b into which the lower portion of the rear curtain plate member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41 b extends in the left and right direction, and extends from the rear position of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recessed portion 41 b widens the volume of the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate formed by the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 as much as possible.

  The front curtain plate member 42 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height The entire rear side is open. The front curtain member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear curtain plate member 43 so as to cooperate with the rear curtain plate member 43 to be part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 The space 40a is formed. The front curtain member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front and back direction and extending in the left and right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The rear curtain plate member 43 has a length in the left-right direction extending slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape whose front is open. The rear curtain plate member 43 cooperates with the front curtain plate member 42 to form the inner curtain plate space 40 a which becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 by attaching the front curtain plate member 42 to the front. The rear curtain plate member 43 has a cylindrical connection cylindrical portion 43a which extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward and communicates with the inner curtain plate space 40a at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylindrical portion 43 a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear curtain plate 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylindrical portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction which is about 1/3 the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and a depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. Is also formed slightly short. In the connection cylindrical portion 43a, a plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In communication with the internal space of 620 a, an enclosure 624 is formed.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the gaming ball B is retained at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the gaming ball B is held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is for preventing that it is pinched.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is provided with a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 to be described later may be involved; A first discharge port 44b opened upward at the left end of the left end 44a, and a second discharge port 44c opened upward on the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a; An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the resting portion 44a, and an upper end projection projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and inclined to be positioned upward as the upper surface goes rearward And a unit 44e.

  The first discharge port 44 b is formed at a position that matches the discharge hole 60 d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open at the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the gaming ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, when the ball biting preventing mechanism 44 is inserted into a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire is inserted. The rising wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tool entry. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d, even if it is bent upward, it abuts on the forwardly projecting upper end projecting portion 44e provided on the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent action from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the gaming ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is blocked by 44d, the gaming ball B is easily retained on the placement portion 44a. Then, when the game ball B is staying on the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 can not be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is firstly discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The lower outer frame assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front and rear curtain plate members 42 and 43 at a distance to the left and right and the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front and rear direction and attached to the inside of the front curtain plate member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46; And a frame-like seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the pair of guide members 45. The guide member 45 is formed of a low friction material having low friction resistance, and the lower end of the main body frame 4 is made slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain inner space 40 a (the enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. In the port member 47, two cylinders are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonate and amplify the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (in the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (player's side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass.

  The seal member 48 is compressed between the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame and upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. Fig.21 (a) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2, and was seen from the front upper, and (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11 a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30 b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 extends from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a to the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends horizontally from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extension 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending to the left and right center of the front extension 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion The plate-like horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from the end edge to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open from the left side to the front side of the front extension 51b And a flat plate-like end edge wall 51e which is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front and rear direction, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a left side extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally forward to the left and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the rear end of the lock main body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to abut on a portion of the edge wall 51e which extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the attachment hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion on the front side of the lock main body 52a in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view by rotating the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end moves leftward by the operation of the operation piece 52b, and the bearing groove 51c Can be completely through. Thereby, the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. And an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a; and a discharge hole 60d which has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through vertically through the horizontal portion 60a. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached at a left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and extends in a reverse U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The lower portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the state assembled to the outer frame 2, and a screw not shown Is fixed to the rear curtain member 43 by the Further, the rising portion 60 b is attached to a portion on the front side of the bulging portion 11 b in the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60 d matches the first discharge port 44 b of the anti-ball bite mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between 4 and 4 gradually narrows, it rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be more easily prevented from rolling backward than the main frame 4 by discharging the game balls B from the discharge holes 60 d. It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball B to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 22 is a surface view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a substantially the same size as the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 can be attached openably from the front side It is done. The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in the front view extends vertically, and the game board 5 which is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4 A glass unit 160 closing the gaming area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a crime prevention cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, A handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner, a pan unit 200 mounted to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and a front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the pan unit 200. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101 a which is formed in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in which the outer shape of the front view extends vertically, and the front right of the door frame base 101 Handle attachment member 102 attached below, speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and attached near the rear end right end in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the left side A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the rear handlebar relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104, and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handlebar relay board 106 from the rear side A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and a door A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the gaming balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 which can be operated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 can be inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing the game which is thrown into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31 (a) is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side in a front view in a hinge rotatable manner with respect to the main body frame 4 and closes the front of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular, flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle attachment member 102 attached to the front lower right of the door frame base 101 for attaching the handle unit 180. And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in a rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in the rear view in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 A door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the substrate 104 and a handle back relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, the door frame base 101 The back handle handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the back of the handlebar and covers the handle back handle relay board 106 from the back side, and is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 to cover the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-like door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 180 is in the front lower corner, the dish unit 200 is in the lower front of the door window 101a, the door frame left side unit 400 is in the front left outside of the door window 101a, and A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

  Further, the glass frame 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and the transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the door window 101a formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 101 up and down It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101 a penetrating in the front and back direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the front right lower corner of the front view and is inclined such that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the front end and the insertion recess 101c in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth in the cylinder lock 130 The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b are penetrated back and forth in front view left side, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 And a ball feed opening 101e for facing the

  The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates the ball outlet 150d of the far cover unit 150 forward for the lower bowl ball A passing hole 101f, a ball passing hole 101g for the upper tray which penetrates forward and backward through the ball passage 150a of the far cover unit 150 so as to penetrate forward and backward adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view And a glass unit attachment portion 101h into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, which is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed at the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper plate) in a front view and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i has the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200 located forward and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101 j which passes through in the front and rear direction below the door window 101 a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101 b. A wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the plate unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101 j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 to be described later penetrates It is formed to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1 b. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 102a, and a tubular A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c which project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a The outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a are provided.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102 b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. The three ridges 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state in which the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similar inclined state.

[3-1 c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. When the speaker duct 103 is in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 The player can be favorably guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker opening 211 b of the dish unit base 211.

  Moreover, the speaker duct 103 is equipped with the cable holder 103a which hold | maintains the connection cable 503 in the back surface of the downward direction of a cylindrical site | part. The cable holder 103 a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is the same as that of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1 d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle back relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle back relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay substrate 104 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle back relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. And FIG. 84) are connected.

  The outer shape of the door frame sub relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending right and left on the front view right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically is combined and extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left of the frame main relay board 104 in a rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 and the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc. and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay substrate 104 and the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 with the door frame base unit 100 assembled are The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the rear cover unit 150.

  The handle back relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting surface 101 b below the ball feeding opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle back relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. To relay the When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the handle back relay board 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered by the handle back relay board cover 108.

[3-1 e. Door frame relay board cover · handle back relay board cover · cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the back handle handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a part extending in the reverse L shape up and down) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape whose front and left in front view are open. In the state assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 covering the rear side and the door frame sub relay board 105 are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle back relay board cover 108 is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the back side of the handle back relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is used. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and an opening for passing the wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction of the lower surface.

[3-1 f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is connected to the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending up and down, which are disposed apart from each other on the left and right, and the left and the right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 which has been extended, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 which is attached at the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 to the left and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of vertically spaced apart mountings on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked And the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes which are vertically separated and penetrated in the front-rear direction. In these insertion holes, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame wedge 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the width of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction with a width greater than the width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 in the vertical direction. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched in a square shape from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end. The notch portion 114 a is formed at a position where the upper plate ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b coincide with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is disposed to be separated left and right, and in a front view, has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending flatly forward from the side and a flat plate-like front piece portion connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extending portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the site of the insertion hole penetrating in the front and rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are stamped and formed of a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is , And assembled so as to be located below the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder attachment frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101 c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame and hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 mounted movably in the vertical direction on the hinge bracket 121, and a hook attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a square shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the attachment piece 121a is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The wedge member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of projecting pieces 121 b of the door frame upper hinge pin 122. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the wedge member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124 via the wedge member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121 b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121 b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out downward. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in a front view is rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 extending in the vertical direction is coaxial with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square-shaped flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The mounting piece 125 a and the protruding piece 125 b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125 b when assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is attached.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinged rotatably with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the body frame lower hinge member. Can.

[3-1 i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking with The cylinder lock 130 is attached to a cylindrical cylinder main body 131 extending in the front and rear direction, a key hole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 And a rotation transmitting member 133 which rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter becomes larger toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of cutouts to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 for rotation.

  The cylinder lock 130 is in a state where the front end of the cylinder main body 131 substantially matches the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the pan unit main body 252 in the pan unit 200 when assembled in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 22 etc.).

[3-1 j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to the ball emitting device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game stored in the upper plate 201 The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by the operation of the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a which is supplied with gaming balls B from the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. And the rear end of the front cover 141 are closed and the front is opened in a box shape, and the game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front and rear direction A front cover pivotally supported on a rear cover 142 having a striking ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and an axis extending between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 in the front-rear direction. The ball extraction member 143 having a partition 143a that divides the entrance 141a from the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game ball B on the partition 143a of the ball extraction 143 one back cover 14 The ball feeding member 144 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. And a ball feed solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144 A ball feed solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feed member 144, respectively.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. From 141c, an operating rod 143c of a ball pullout member 143 described later extends forward. Also, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed and guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper ball. And it is formed so that the site | part currently open | released to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from a back side.

  The ball extraction member 143 divides the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b below the inlet 141a, and has a partition 143a whose upper surface is lowered in the direction of the ball feeding member 144; Around an axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and being bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b from near the middle in the vertical direction and the lower end extends in the front and rear direction , A rod-like operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a lower part of the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 143c moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extraction button 222 of the disc unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 is directed to the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-like plan view centering on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and the back of the blocking portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b which is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 144c which extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one gaming ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis by moving the collar portion 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 144 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 144b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 142a at the same time as the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b has a partition portion 143a. It is pivoted between the directionally oriented holding position. When the ball feed member 144 is at the supply position, the gaming ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540 and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the game ball B remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b is directed to the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b is closed at the ball feeding port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding movement rod 146 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 147 for pivoting the ball feeding member 144 around the vertically extending axis.

  The ball feed operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable about an axially extending axis. It is done. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feed around the right end The left end side closer to the crank 147 is pivoted to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. As it is pivoted back to its initial state. As a result, the ball feed operating rod 146 causes the left end portion (tip) near the ball feed crank 147 to swing in the vertical direction by the ball feed solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and extends in the left and right direction, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b disposed on the side opposite to the side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft portion 147b And a transmission portion 147c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, whereby the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be pivoted about an axis extending back and forth.

  When the ball feed solenoid 140 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed unit 140 is in a state where the ball feed operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is held Turn to That is, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 144 receives one game ball B, and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 190) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the ball extracting member 143 pivotally supported pivotally or by the weight portion 143 d. However, the actuating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball extracting member 143 abuts on the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 222 of the disc unit 200. In the normal state, since the rotation is restricted, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b, and is separated. The game ball B does not intrude.

  Then, when the player presses the upper disc ball extraction button of the dish unit downward, the upper disc ball extraction slider slides downward with the operation transmission unit, and the movement lever 143c is moved with the movement of the operation transmission section downward. Will move relatively downward. When the actuating rod 143c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion, the ball extracting member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition Is released. As a result, the gaming ball B entering from the entrance 141a drops toward the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball withdrawal guiding path 241c of the unit 240 after pulling out the upper ball in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper disc ball removal slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242 b with which the operation rod 143 c of the ball removal member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B on the partition part 143 a Can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the actuating rod 143c, so that breakage of the ball pullout member 143 etc. can be prevented, and the gaming ball B is a partition It is possible to prevent bouncing back at 143a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) etc.) that is recessed forward on the upper right in the back view of the hitting supply port 142a of the rear cover 142. A tamperproof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142 b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated into upper and lower portions 148a at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. A lower piece portion 148b, and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered manner on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other . The upper piece portion 148 a of the tamperproof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamperproof member 148 so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148 b extends in the same plane as the general surface of the tamperproof member 148. Thus, in the plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove extending toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b is in communication with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to this fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 and attached to the illegal gaming ball B The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit ball) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed such that the illegal game ball B is moved into and out of the first starting opening by operating the strap The V-shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b after the string attached to the illegal gaming ball B is inserted between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b by It is possible to cut off by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using an illegal gaming ball B attached with a string.

[3-1 k. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of a front cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed. The false cover unit 150 is attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in a rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 150 is a shallow box-like unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit main body 151 And 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and a through ball passage 150a which brings the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 into communication with the upper countersink supply port of the dish unit; The full ball receiving opening 150b is open toward the rear on the lower right side in the front view of the through ball passage 150a and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 .

  In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward at the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 150b and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main frame 4 The ball ball socket 150c for receiving the game ball B (far ball) and the game ball B which is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view and received by the full tank ball socket 150b and the ball ball socket 150c. And a ball outlet 150d for discharging forward and communicating with the lower ball inlet of the tray unit.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receptacle 150b and the far ball receptacle 150c and the ball outlet 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of gaming balls B. A reservoir passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through ball passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receptacle 150 b and the far ball receptacle 150 c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball outlet 150 d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  In addition, the flat cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152; And a spring 155 for biasing the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e. The full tank detection sensor 154 detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e.

  In the far cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the gaming balls B and the gaming balls B are not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, to some extent in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the gaming balls B moves the upper end of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. As the movable piece 153 rotates, the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls B, so if fullness is detected by the full detection sensor 154, the payout of more gaming balls B is stopped At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall of that effect, and to urge the player to eliminate the filling of the lower tray 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150 a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the dispensing passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 described later of the body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f is provided to which the actuating projection 613a of 613 can abut (see FIG. 91). The door opening and closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to lower end of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full delivery passage 610b The front opening can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably inserted from the rear into the glass unit attachment portion 101 h so as to close the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 enables the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (forward) It closes the front of the area 5a.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 101h larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the inside of the glass frame 161 closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be in contact with the projection 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit attachment member 163 has a disk-like base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a bar-like projection from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 by the protrusion 163b when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163 is located below the base 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the protrusion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the backward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 170 is disposed with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear projection 172 projecting short rearwardly along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 171, and left and right And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward beyond the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed along a portion of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection 172, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projection 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area It does not prevent the game ball B from being driven into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is resiliently locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the crime prevention cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projection 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the player. It is a thing.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182 A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is rotatably attached by an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 at the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 It has a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 held between the base 186 and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 to return the handle 182 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in a direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 and a tip end projecting outward from the left side in a front view outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 A single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 and a single-shot button 193 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186 and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 181b radially projecting from the front end of the base 181a, and a cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three grooves 181 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102 c of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c can be inserted in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is such that the side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the portion of the handle 182 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Is slightly lower. The second protrusion 182 b is configured such that the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges outward and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 182a It also protrudes slightly high. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182 d are inclined in a substantially linear shape, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183 a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183 a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by penetrating the slit 182 e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the attachment boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the attachment boss 183a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In the present example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and has a light transmitting property. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a three-dimensionally formed lens member of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (the open side). The handle unit 180 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can make the user perform the turning operation without a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 542 in the ball emission device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, when the handle 182 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is applied with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Thus, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Also, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button manipulation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193, the operation before the one-shot button 193 is performed. The game ball B can be re-injected into the game area 5a with the hitting strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes, in the handle 182, four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, and the handle 182 is rotated most in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Of the first protrusion 182 a when the fourth protrusion 182 d does not rotate the handle 182 when the game ball B is most strongly hit into the game area 5 a (so-called “right hit”). The position is substantially the same as the position, so that the player can maintain the handle 182 at the position of “right-handed” in a comfortable state by changing the fourth protrusion 182 d as the first protrusion 182 a and holding the handle 182. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit from the back. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate units disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 at a position lower than the door window 101 a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper dish 201 and the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls B for hitting into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper dish 201 and the far cover unit 150 And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The pan unit 200 has a pan 201 and is mounted on the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The pan unit 210 is mounted on the front of the pan base unit 210. And a rendering operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-like plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate body 212 attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 attached to the front and projecting forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the top surface of the mounting base 213; An upper counterball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper counterball removal unit 240 mounted at the rear of the upper counterball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. Tray unit main body 252, a lower plate ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decorative unit 270 separately attached to the upper front of the plate unit main body 252 A dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 mounted below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 capable of rotating operation by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by pressing operation by the player. The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 for emitting and decorating the rendering operation ring 330, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320 Vibration speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 And have.

  The whole is bulging forward as a whole, and the rendering operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 is obliquely upward forward at the center in the lateral direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper surface While the upper plate 201 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, the ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed, and the lower plate 202 is disposed on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and to the left of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed of the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in the shape of a container which is largely expanded forward on the left side than the center in the left and right in a front view. In the upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding to the rear as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). See). In the upper tray 201, the entire bottom surface including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end side in a front view of the guiding passage portion 201a is below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is placed on the lower end of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper ball supply port 211a. It inclines so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thus, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

  The induction passage portion 201a is provided with a metal earth metal fitting 201b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to make the game ball Static electricity charged to B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction in a front view. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the gaming balls B, and is provided at the bottom wall with a lower countersink extraction hole 202a which penetrates up and down and can discharge the gaming balls B. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202 a of the lower tray 202 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lower bowl ball extraction unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends leftward and rightward, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray 202, lower countersink holes 202a penetrating vertically are disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower ball open hole 202a. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located in front of the lower bowl ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the tray unit 200.

  The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower flat ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and open the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the above can be discharged to the lower side (e.g., dollar box) of the dish unit 200. Further, in the state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower flat ball supply port 211c, so It is possible to quickly discharge the released game ball B downward from the lower ball extraction hole 202a by the movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5 c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front.

  The plate base unit 210 is a flat plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The mounting base 213 is attached to the right of the main body 212 and the upper pan body 212 at the upper front of the pan unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213 at the front of the pan unit base 211 And the tray unit relay board 214.

  Further, the bowl base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper bowling ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , And an after-the-counter ball removal unit 240 mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 211 at the rear of the table ball removal front unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front face of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 101 Box-shaped).

  The pan unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan ball supply port 211a and the upper pan and ball supply port 211a extending cylindrically rearward. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower circular bulb supply port 211c which penetrates back and forth in the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and cylindrically extends backward; A notch 211d is notched in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c and has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and front and rear in the front right upper side of the lower flat ball supply port 211c And an upper flat ball feed port 211e which extends upward and downward and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, and is raised on the left side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, on which the mounting base is placed. A slider insertion port 211g which penetrates back and forth in the lower part of the pan body and into which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper disc ball removal slider 242 of the upper disc ball removal unit 240 is inserted and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view Handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view And a mouth 211i.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 211 a of the bowl unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper bowl 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper bowl ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101 g is penetrated from the front side to be connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B dispensed from the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 is supplied (dispensed) into the upper tray 201 through the upper ball dispensing port 211 a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and the cylindrical rear end is the lower disc ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected with the front end of ball emission mouth 150d of far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower countersink supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball extraction guiding path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the removal of the upper ball is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower ball supply port 211c. ing. Thus, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is operated by the upper plate ball extraction button 222, the upper ball supply port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the upper The lower ball and ball supply port 211c is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b and the ball removal and introducing passage 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper flat ball feeding port 211 e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241 a of the rear base 241 in the upper flat ball dropping unit 240 in a state assembled to the flat base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the unit 240 after ball removal to the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the upper dish 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends in the left and right direction, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges forward largely from the center in the left and right in a front view. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes backward as going from the most bulging part to the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B ing. The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper tray main body 212 is closed at the top near the right end.

  The upper tray main body 212 is attached to the lower end of the bowl unit 200 so that the portion closed at the upper side in the vicinity of the right end sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled in the tray unit 200. Further, in the upper tray main body 212, a rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper portion, and a part of the rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the pan base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the pan unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211 f of the pan unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper side is open. The mounting base 213 is provided with an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetration port 213b penetrating vertically in the rear right corner.

  The insertion hole 213a of the mounting base 213 is a hole through which the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is removed. Moreover, the wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213 b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay substrate 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, and the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 , And relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The tray unit relay substrate 214 is attached to the right of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the back side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 Or, after inserting a prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of gaming balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or It is for deducting and returning the part of the game ball B from which the cash and prepaid card thrown in to were loaned out, or returning.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball extraction button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221 A light transmitting disc-like ball lending operation base 223 disposed to the right of the extraction button 222, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper ball ball extraction button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is configured of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be viewed through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball extraction button 222. Further, after inserting a prepaid card with cash or balance into the ball lending machine and pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display unit when the ball rental machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Upper flat ball removal unit and upper flat ball removal unit]
The unit 230 for removing the upper ball and the unit for removing the upper ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper flat ball extraction unit 230 and the upper flat ball extraction unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed to operate the upper tray 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower tray 202.

  The upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement projection 211 f on the front surface of the bowl unit base 211. The upper bowl ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the bowl unit base 211 at a position behind the upper bowl ball removal unit 230.

  The upper ball and ball removal front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the disk unit base 211 and extends in the up and down direction, and is movably inserted in the cylinder of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 211 near the front of the upper pan and ball feed port 211 e and the slider insertion port 211 g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper flat ball extraction. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper countersink ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the disk unit base 211 so as to close the upper ball and ball supply port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction An upper ball ball slide slider 242 slidably mounted, a spring 243 urging the upper ball ball slide slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241; Is equipped.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is opened forward and a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. The ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received gaming ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and the game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b And a ball extraction guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and guiding it to the right in a rear view.

  The ball socket 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feed guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feed unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the gaming ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 is made to enter the entrance 141 a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241 a and the ball feeding guide path 241 b.

  The portions of the ball extraction guide path 241c that extend to the left and right are projected to the right in the rear view and inclined so that the right end in the rear view is lower than the part to which the upper disc ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached. And open on the right side in a rear view. The rear side of the ball extension guiding path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The upper part of the part extending vertically up and down below the ball feeding and guiding passage 241b is located in front of the ball pulling out port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when the ball pulling and guiding passage 241c is assembled in the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending leftward and rightward is formed so as to be connected to the notch portion 211 d of the lower circular bulb supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the gaming ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guiding path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

  The upper flat ball slide slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242 a that protrudes forward from the upper left corner and the operation receiving portion 242 a And an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a is formed flat. In addition, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper ball ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the front flat ball. Further, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation transmission portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates the ball extraction member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. A weir 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper countersink slider 242, and the upper countersink slider 242 is biased upward. Therefore, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

  The upper counter ball removal unit 230 and the upper counter ball removal unit 240 have the upper counter ball removal slider 242 positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper counter ball removal slider 242 The upper flat screen extraction button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper flat ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmission portion 242b is blocked. The partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b to separate the two.

  Therefore, in a state in which the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b is partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball socket 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting supply port 142a to the ball emitting device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 The actuating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removal member 143 rotates the ball removal member 143 to divide the partition 143a. Is retracted from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the gaming ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receptacle 241a and the ball feed guiding path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. It will be done. The gaming ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower flat ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper plate 201 are discharged into the lower plate 202 after being discharged into the plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is released, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper pan via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 is lifted, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the actuating rod 143c in contact with the actuating transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  As described above, the gaming ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5 d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202 and is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 is decorating almost the whole of the dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish main body 251 and the dish unit base to cover the outer circumference of the lower dish main body 251. A bowl unit main body 252 attached to the front of the bowl 211, a lower bowl ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower bowl main body 251, and a bowl separately mounted on the upper front of the bowl unit main body 252 A lower left decoration unit 280 and a lower right decoration unit mounted below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 on the entire surface of the main unit 252 And 285.

[3-5 d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) which extends in the left and right direction and is open at the upper and the rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the front lower portion of the tray unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear is closed.

  The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends in the left and right direction, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray main body 251, in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view, a lower countersink hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed. The lower tray main body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof is lowered toward the lower spherical ball opening 202a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball ball extraction lid 265 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower tray body 251 is in a state in which the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the tray unit main body 252 in a state where the lower tray main body 251 is assembled in the tray decoration unit 250. Further, the lower tray main body is in a state assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is positioned lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is a lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5 d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210, and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The pan unit body 252 bulges so that the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left and right direction bulges forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the plate unit main body 252 is curved such that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in the shape of a box opened rearward.

  The pan unit main body 252 bulges forward toward the center in the left and right direction from the left and right ends in the upper part and extends upward and separately from the upper side bulged part 252a spaced apart in the left and right And a bottom plate portion 252c extending in the form of a flat plate from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b to the rear in such a manner as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251. .

  The left and right upper side bulging parts 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and the front left plate top left decoration unit 270, the plate bottom left decoration unit 280, the plate top right decoration unit 275 and the plate bottom right decoration unit 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The pan unit main body 252 is formed with a lower pan opening 252d which penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that the player's finger can be inserted, and the lower plate opening 252d is formed to be wider upward and downward as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 is a front notch portion 252e which is notched upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is notched at a lower part of The lower countersunk ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Furthermore, the pan unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted; It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h which penetrates the decoration part 252b back and forth and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging parts 252a which becomes the center in the horizontal direction. And a rendering operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where it is assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower disc ball extraction button 263 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260 faces forward from the front notch portion 252e, and the lower disc ball extraction base 261 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5 d-3. Lower bowl ball removal unit]
The lower ball ball extraction unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and stores the game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges the game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction holes 202a. It is intended to

  The lower disc ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower disc body 251 and has a flat lower disc ball extraction base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view; A slider 262 slidably mounted to the front and back on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower countersunk ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward; The lower disc ball lid 265 opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and the holding mechanism 266 holds the lower disc ball lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262.

  The lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed to close the bottom notch 252f of the disk unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a of the lower disk 202 (lower disk main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front and rear direction, and is slidably mounted on the lower disc ball removal base 261 in the front and rear direction at a position from the center in the left-right direction to the left. The slider 262 is provided with a projecting pin projecting cylindrically upward.

  The lower disc ball ejection lid 265 is attached to the lower disc ball ejection base 261 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending up and down at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at the left end side. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower flat ball lid 265 is formed with a slit extending in the left and right direction in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 260, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the plate unit main body 252 in a state assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate 252c. In addition, the lower countersunk ball extraction button 263 is facing forward from the front cutout 252e of the main dish unit main body 252. Under normal conditions, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower microcontroller ball lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole in the normal state. And the through hole (the lower countersink hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265, and the gaming ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in the normal state, the front surface of the lower ball ball extraction button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  Under normal conditions, when the lower ball extraction button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower ball extraction button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower flat ball lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower flat ball lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end is backward It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower countersunk ball lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower countersink hole 202a is opened, The gaming ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  In addition, when the slider 262 is moved backward by the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 is not moved forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower ball removal cover 265 is kept turned to the rear, and the lower ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the gaming balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously used. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower ball extraction hole 202a from this state, when the lower ball extraction button 263 which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pushed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. Ru. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball releasing button 263 returns to the state where it matches the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower ball removal cover 265 is pivoted so that the right end side is located immediately above the through hole, and the lower ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265. Thus, the gaming balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5 d-4. Upper left decoration unit and upper right decoration unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the main unit 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are for decorating the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semicylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271 A dish upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the back side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending to the left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the back into the dish upper left decoration 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decoration substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper left decoration 271 can be made to emit light.

  The left upper part of the upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the left left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the upper central decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left decoration 271 is The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semicylindrical shape extending laterally and has a light transmitting property, the dish upper right decoration 276 and the dish upper right reflector 277 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right decoration 276, A dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is mounted on the back side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decoration 276 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely rightward at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from behind into the dish upper right decoration 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decoration 276 can be decorated to emit light.

  The right upper part of the upper right decoration unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the upper part decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are illuminated, the entire front face of the dish upper right decoration 276 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 are partially assembled to the door frame 3. The upper left portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decorative unit 250 is partially protruded upward. The step in which the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 side become higher can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook a finger using the step between the upper left decoration unit 270 and upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is equalized. Alternatively, the finger can be used when operating the effect operation unit 301 to be described later. Further, the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward by the step between the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a.

[3-5 d-5. Lower left decoration unit and lower right decoration unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower portion of the front of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the main unit 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 respectively. Be The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 .

  The lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The lower left decoration 281 has a lower left reflector 282 mounted on the rear side of the lower left decoration 281. A dish lower left decorative substrate 283 mounted on the back side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The lower left decorative body 281 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decorative body 271 and the upper right decorative body 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped so that the semi-cylinder is bent. The left lower end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. This dish lower left decoration 281 is formed milky white.

  The lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decoration board 283 is a full color LED, and by emitting light, the lower left decoration 281 can be made to emit light.

  With the lower left decoration unit 280 assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it looks as if the left end is sunk into the door frame 3. The lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical, horizontally extending, light transmitting dish lower right decoration 286 and a dish lower right decoration attached to the back of the dish lower right decoration 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decoration substrate 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The dish lower right decoration 286 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a of the right side. The lower right decoration 286 is a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the half cylinder is formed to be bent. The right lower end of the lower right decoration 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. This dish lower right decoration 286 is formed milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the back into the inside of the dish lower right decoration 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish lower right decoration 286 can be decorated with light emission.

  The right lower end of the lower right decoration unit 285 is located below the right end of the upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. In the lower right decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration 286 of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decoration unit 285 has no rib in the middle of the dish lower right decoration 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plural LEDs of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the dish lower right decoration 286 The entire front surface of the light emitting device can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5 e. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the pan unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the direction of movement of the effect operation button. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and while decorating the plate unit 200, the player operates and participates in the rendering when the player participation type rendering is performed. It can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than a half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. The ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation portion 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 A transmission gear 350 for operation ring that transmits rotation between the unit 302 and the gear 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for operation ring to the operation portion base 320.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the rendering operation ring 330, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 The decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the above, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face inside the ring of the effect operation ring 330 The rendering operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Effect operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and expanded forward, and a unit front The dish center upper reflector 313 is mounted from the rear in the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decoration substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear in the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 And a lower center decoration substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit main body 252 It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to a virtual plane formed on the front semicircular arc extending upper end edge is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drainage holes 311 a formed at the lowest position when assembled into the pan unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape in which the shape of the unit front cover 312 bulges forward so that the shape in plan view follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. It is attached. The unit front cover 312 is a plate central upper decoration 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front below the dish central upper decoration 312a. And a dish center lower decoration body 312 b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulging semicircular arc follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the dish center lower decoration 312 b.

  The plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed by dividing a cylinder of substantially the same thickness (radius) into halves and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the dividing surface facing the center side It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends with a large curvature in a semicircular arc shape with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It has a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish upper center decoration 312a protrudes forward than the front end of the dish center lower decoration 312b. Further, when assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper center decoration body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275 The left and right ends of 312 b are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the dish lower right decoration unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed milky white.

  The front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about half the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish upper central reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape which bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish central upper decoration body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper center decoration body 312a can be illuminated and decorated.

  The lower center dish reflector 315 is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the lower stage center decoration 312 b of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The lower center dish reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower dish center lower decoration substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b can be lighted and decorated.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of extending in a semicircular arc shape in the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, so When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower center lower decoration substrate 316 are made to emit light, the whole can be emitted and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end projecting forward more than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish upper center decoration body 312a is continuous with the dish upper left decoration body 271 and the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b is the dish lower left decoration body 281 and the dish right It is continuous with the lower decoration 286. Thus, the rendering operation unit 300 is made to stand out and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Controller base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper tray main body 212 in the dish base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container whose top is open.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having a substantially cubic outer shape and extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 whose upper portion is open, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape The upper attachment which is formed on the flange base 322, the plurality of (here four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom of the main body 321, and the rear end of the flange 322 and attached to the disc base unit 210 A portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 which is opened upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outside of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for operation ring.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into a sound such as voice or music and output it. it can.

  The leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. In the main body portion 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outer side of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outer side of the rear wall.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer periphery thereof substantially matches the inner periphery of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312. A rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 and a decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the rendering operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for operation ring around an axis extending in the left and right direction in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is attached to the gear bearing 325, the upper portion of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring protrudes upward, and the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is a flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  The upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly lower than the upper surface of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in a state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 300. Moreover, in the state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with it.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 55, FIG. 56 and the like. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 which can be rotationally operated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) about twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

  The rendering operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and rotatably mounted around a vertically extending shaft on the ring mounting base 331 and are attached to the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotating base 332 upward And a ring retaining member 334 which regulates the movement.

  Also, the rendering operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 that constitutes a part of the rotational operation portion 302 and the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation portion 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 to constitute a part of the rotation operation portion 302 And an in-ring cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light transmitting annular shape.

  The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the placement portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably disposed in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge and the placement portion 331a on the upper surface And a boss 331 b for projecting cylindrically upward from a plurality (four in this case) of parts and for mounting the bush 333 rotatably and spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting part 331 a on the upper surface And a through-hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. The plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The outer diameter of the rotation base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332 a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed in a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes to the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332 a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332 a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332 a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350 a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which circular arcs forming the outer and upper portions in a circular shape are arranged three-dimensionally And an outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extending in the circumferential direction after extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335 a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc in the range of 1⁄4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335 b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335 c extends slightly lower than the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer lower portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a in the circumferential direction And a plurality of outer lower cover attachment portions 336b arranged in plural. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336 b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc constituting an inner upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis And an inner cover attachment portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1⁄8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337 c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion in the range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 is capable of emitting light by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the rear. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the left front. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating and driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for operation ring A gear cover rotatably mounting the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covering the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side 346, and.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346, and detects a rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape which is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and opened leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is constituted by a spur gear-like first gear 344a meshing with the drive gear, and a spur gear-like second gear 344b integrally rotating with the first gear 344a and having a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a having a diameter (a size twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) larger than the transmission gear 344 and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345 b have a length in the circumferential direction equal to the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345 b are arranged circumferentially at intervals of a rotational angle of 45 degrees. The detection pieces 345 b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345 b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated at a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is supposed to be. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected through the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring. Engage with Further, the whole of the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 can freely set the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 may cause the rotary operation unit 302 to oscillate in a reciprocating manner by oscillating the drive gear 343 by means of the operation ring drive motor 342 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  In the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345 b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be given to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by combining these as appropriate, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The transmission gear 350 for operation ring of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation portion base 320 It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The transmission gear 350 for operation ring rotates integrally with the ring gear portion 350a in the bevel gear shape, which meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340 And a spur gear-like drive-side gear portion 350b engaged with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The pitch circle of the ring gear portion 350a and the drive gear portion 350b are formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-like ring side gear portion 350 a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for operation ring is inserted from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320, and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation portion base 320, so that it is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320. Be

  In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Effect operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can emit light and decorate the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annular ring is divided back and forth, and is configured of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arrayed along the outer circumference on each of the top surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is covered with a decoration substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. Similar to the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, the decoration substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear, and is a front substrate cover that covers the front decoration substrate 352a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 A rear substrate cover 353 b and a rear substrate cover 353 b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 from the upper side covering the rear decorative substrate 352 b are configured.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and thereby the rotation operation unit 302 is configured through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331 c of the ring attachment base 331. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated and decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the light emission decoration that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and can output various frequency vibrations in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared to a vibration device in which a decentered weight is rotated by a motor, and can present more colorful effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The rendering operation button unit 360 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 which can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is configured of a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has an outer periphery formed in a substantially circular shape, and is disposed at an object bordering on a central axis of the button unit base 361 attached within the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the button unit base 361. A disc-like member having a pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having a circular outer periphery smaller than the button unit base 361 Between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, the guide shaft 362 is movably attached in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disc-shaped lifting and lowering base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the presentation operation button unit 360 extends cylindrically upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has a central shaft 366 whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363 and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361 Engaging with the operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361 and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably inserted by the central shaft 366 being inserted therein. 370, the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected and the central shaft A lift cam member 371 for vertically moving the lift base 364 by inserting and rotatably attaching and moving the lift base 364, the lift drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lift cam drive gear member 370 is covered from above. And a disk-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose inner diameter is larger than the upper base and extends vertically, and is mounted movably in the vertical direction by the pair of guide shafts 362 above the lift base 364 Substantially the same as the central button main body 373 and a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the elevation base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward; The central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter and the upper end side is closed and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing portion 303a.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button main body 373 on the upper surface of the elevation base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted; An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative substrate 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 and a portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covering the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and raised and lowered so as to cover the outer peripheral surface and upper surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having translucency with three-dimensional decoration A transparent perimeter button attached to the base 364 with the center button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is configured by the outer periphery substrate cover 378, the outer periphery decoration lens 379, and the outer periphery button cover 380.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and the elevation cam driving gear member 370. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting a rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base main body 361 a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361 b projecting downward from the base main body 361 a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed in a size slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The lower end of the leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached on the top surface of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361 a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter that is about one half of the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevation base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The lift base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a in which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrated with a size that allows the lift cam member 371 to pass through at the center. An upright wall portion 364c cylindrically projecting upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axial core and rotatably mounted around the axial core.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The upper end of the upright wall 364c abuts on the upper base 363 to restrict the upward movement of the elevating base 364 and a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button main body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364c. It is formed. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The lift cam drive gear member 370 has a spur gear-like gear portion 370a engaged with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b projecting upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the lift cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. The elevating detection piece 370 c has two cylindrical portions projecting downward from the lower side and facing each other, which are notched and detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The lift cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by the central shaft 366 being inserted at the center. The lift cam member 371 is spaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface, and includes a pair of cam portions 371a protruding outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pins 364 d of the elevation base 364.

  The cam portion 371a has a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end parallel to the axial center, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364 d of the lift base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371 a.

  Further, the lift cam member 371 is provided at the lower end thereof with a connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the lift cam drive gear member 370.

  The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the lift cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as. The raising and lowering cam member 371 can rotate and thereby guide the guide pin 364d of the raising and lowering base 364 by the cam portion 371a to raise and lower the raising and lowering base 364.

  The central button body 373 penetrates the cylindrical portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b, and the pair of guide shafts A pair of guide holes 373c into which the guide 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevation base 364 and downward from the bottom It includes a pressing detection piece 373 e which is projected and detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373 f which project in a cylindrical shape rearward from the bottom portion 373 b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the cylindrical portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom 373 b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373 d is formed in a cylindrical shape which is extended short downward, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the lift base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button main body 373 is restricted. Through the central opening 373 d of the central button body 373, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f is inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f is formed such that the lower end extends downward through the lift base 364 and a screw having a washer inserted therein is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts the lower surface of the lift base 364 to restrict the upward movement of the central button body 373.

  When the bottom portion 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the elevation base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 It is formed to project downward through 364. The central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevation springs 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to be translucent. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

  The central button decoration substrate 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface as full color LEDs. The center button decoration substrate 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full color LEDs. The outer circumference button decoration substrate 377 can cause the outer circumference decoration lens 379 and the outer circumference button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and has an annular base portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and cylindrically extending upward from the inner periphery of the base portion 378a. And a cylindrical portion 378 b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as going upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending to the center side from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the effect operation button unit 360, in the assembled state, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is in a state where the elevation base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevation springs 365, The locking portion 371 c of the cam portion 371 a of the lift cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 Also project upward (see FIG. 63 etc.).

  In this state (the state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373 e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303 a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven through the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. While rolling to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in one cam 371b, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relative to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 causes the guide pin 364d to move upward along the second cam 371d. At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to be in the raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in the state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 moves upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected to a position larger than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 when moved to the raised position in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300 (see FIG. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes in contact with the lift base 364. In a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevation base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the central button main body 373 protrudes downward relative to the elevation base 364, but the elevation base 364 is a button unit base 361. Because the pressure detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevation spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and along with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button main body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button main body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 However, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressure on the center button cover 375 (center pressure operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force more than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 lifts the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380 The lower end of the lifting base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevation base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) protrudes upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body The pressing detection piece 373 e does not protrude downward from the elevation base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer periphery button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising and lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button raising and lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 is moved downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d becomes the first cam Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 364d into the locking portion 371c which is recessed upward, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay substrate unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay substrate 392 attached inside the substrate box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay substrate 392 is a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a presentation operation ring decoration board 352, a vibration speaker Relay the connection between the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the central button decoration substrate 376, the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the pressure detection sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in the plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is in the raised position, It is a front view of a saucer unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player on the top surface. The effect operation unit 301 is configured of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a circular center pressing operation unit 303 a positioned at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer periphery pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And 303 b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303 a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b is formed by the outer periphery button cover 380 and the outer periphery substrate cover 378.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operating unit 302 (the rendering operation ring 330) is lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward) .

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Figure 63 etc.)

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates clockwise in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can repeat the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in a range of a predetermined rotation angle to swing the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth to vibrate. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in left side view through the transmission gear 350 for operation ring, and the rotation is performed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors of a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345 b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 spaced apart in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The intervals are not integer multiples. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. Do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. The rotational speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342. . Alternatively, by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavier or to give a click feeling.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more circular arc extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And since the rotation operation part 302 is attached in the state which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of inner peripheral surface exposed, as shown in figure, it is formed in the shape which is easy to grasp with a player's hand .

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that the player can easily do, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 Sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the rotation operation part 302 is attached to the operation part base 320 on the lower surface side, it can not be grasped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the rendering operation unit 300 is provided below the rendering operation ring 330 with a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged. Thus, the light emitting decoration of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be performed by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to emit light and decorate only a specific part of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, the player can be illusive as if the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descent position which projected slightly upwards. In this state, the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303 a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). The sensor 381 detects a press.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) is not moved downward, and the pressing is detected The sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  In the normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b) The biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the pressing base 303 along with the lifting base 364 to vigorously project upward to be in the state of the rising position (see FIG. 65B). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the center pressing unit 303a is pressed downward with the pressing unit 303 in the raised position, first, the center pressing unit 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374 to move the center pressing unit 303a. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b are the rotation operating unit 302. The height is substantially the same as that of the upper surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects a press.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 presses the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b downward with the pressing operation unit 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a is projected above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b. The outer periphery pressing unit 303b and the center pressing unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing unit 303b becomes substantially flush with the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 65A). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment can not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operating unit 301 in the player participation type effect , The player participation type can be more enjoyable.

  In addition, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotating operation may be facilitated by the pressing operation unit 303, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be difficult to perform the rotating operation. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more versatile operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 66 to FIG. Fig.66 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a in the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the front of the door frame left side base 401 A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape which extends vertically and is opened forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip plate shape extending vertically, and is configured of a left side upper decorative substrate 402 a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402 b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can cause the door frame left-side decoration 404 to emit light and decorate by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate.

  The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the form which the half circular arc bulging forward extended up and down. Thus, the door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453 It is formed to be continuous with the lower end on the left side of.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and appears as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends from the right side of the door frame 3 in the form of a flat plate to the front substantially to the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left and right direction And a light emitting side window interior decoration 410b disposed in a plurality in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 is a player who makes it difficult to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right in the gaming hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 inconspicuous, and to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward cylindrically and arranged in a row vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the plurality of side window in-window decorative members 412 And an internal reflector 414 which is inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration 410b.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed to the front of the front end of the side window inner decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the door frame A door extending in a plate shape in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and having a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction to constitute a side window 410a It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 Door frame having a through-hole 417a which extends in the shape of a circle and which penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the right side reflector 415 And a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and being opened rearward. The in-side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a connecting the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) in-side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window inner decoration portion 410b of the side window inner decoration member 412 is formed in a truncated cone-like cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed hemispherical ing. In the side window inner decoration member 412, the front end of the side window inner decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower side position to the upper side with respect to the vertical center. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed to have a translucent white light.

  The side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 is attached to the front of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape of upper, lower, left, and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is done.

  The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The inner reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window inner decoration portion 410b into four in the upper, lower, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wave shape such that it moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates in the front and rear direction, and a plurality of through holes 415 a are formed in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, a through hole 417a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip-like plate shape, and is configured of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration 419 to emit light and decorate by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

  The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavelike manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450 It is formed to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends in a wavelike manner forward so that a quarter of the portion from the top protrudes forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and can visually recognize the opposite side through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window inner decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LEDs of the side window inner decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window interior decoration 410b can be illuminated and decorated. Then, the light emission decoration is performed on the side window inner decoration portion 410b, so that the inside of the side window 410a can be made bright and the opposite side can be made less visible through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, since the LED of the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of in-window decorative portions 410b is turned off in the normal state, the side window It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if the player who is searching for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities, the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the other part including the in-side window decorative part 410b. It is possible to make the whole game area 5a hard to see from the player, and by making it hard to receive the feeling as seen from other players, it is possible to cause the other players to play the game without hesitation .

  Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a glare, and the visibility through the side window 410a changes Let At this time, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial manner, so the side window inner decoration portions 410b are made to be dazzling and the opposite side is made between them It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a from another player such as the next player. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to avoid that another player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the other player is distracted by being noticed. Can prevent you from feeling uncomfortable because you can not concentrate on playing games, or you can feel you are lost due to the induction of mistakes, and you can make the game more fun by letting the player concentrate on playing games It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and (c) is an outside of the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451 attached on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451 And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the frame.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted A door frame top right decoration substrate 457 attached to the right of the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front Have.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and is attached to the front of the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top decoration Between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front of the top top cover 452.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached respectively to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 from below And a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from the lower side, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near upper right end of base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 is a flat plate-like main body portion 451a extending in the right and left in the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction; And a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451 a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined in such a way as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in the shape of a box opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451 b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most projecting forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward as going from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front on the upper surface. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a curvature which becomes smaller as going from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 It is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the lateral direction bulges upward Extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape such that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically separated between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a which are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically in the lateral direction outer side of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464 ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front as full color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can emit light and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decoration 453 to emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs appropriately.

  The top central reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes are formed at the positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending leftward and rightward, and is mounted such that the pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and frontward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

  The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, and the front end thereof is locked to the top upper cover 452 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and the outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419 to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As illustrated, the door frame 3 has, at the center in a front view, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is the dish upper left decoration 271 of the dish unit 200, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame The outer periphery of the door window 101 a is surrounded by the door frame 101 a by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  Top left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, top right decorative body 276, top center decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body Since the reference numeral 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish upper center decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame 101 Behind the door frame top decoration 453, the dish upper left decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration board 278, dish upper center decoration board 314, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top central decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be made to emit light by emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate appropriately. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is coaxially disposed on the upper surface in an annular annular donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 whose diameter is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 and the rotation operating unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 below the rotation operation unit 302. Of the upper and lower two-centered upper decoration 322a and the lower center decoration 312b of a large diameter donut shape (semi-cylindrical shape or semi-tubular shape), The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration of the plate 312b, the door frame right side unit 41 Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, three doughnut-shaped members are vertically aligned with the rotation operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower center decoration 3a and 312b, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer periphery Since the pressing operation unit 303 b and the center pressing operation unit 303 a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish lower left decoration 281 disposed below the dish upper center decoration 312a, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish lower center decoration 312b, The tube-like tube has a slightly smaller thickness, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the lower center dish decoration 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 is larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation portion 302 or the like operable by the player disposed on the upper side. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the tray unit 200, the doughnut-shaped rotational operation portion 302 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotational operation portion 302 has the front end side Since the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 turns. The entire volume of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily viewed, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 performs the rotation operation, so that the player rotates immediately when the player participation type effect is performed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b project more forward than the upper plate 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation section 302, the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are made to stand out At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the pachinko machine 1 different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to appeal the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box whose front is open as shown in the figure, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Can be mounted.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion is insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view Body frame upper hinge member 510 to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted and the body frame mounted on the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2; Body frame lower hinge set attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in a front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500 A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 mounted along the front side upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player, a substrate unit 620 mounted on the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 Back cover 640 which is attached to the main frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and which covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connecting cable guide member for guiding a connecting frame 503 for connecting the main body frame base 501 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose shape in front view extends vertically and a door frame 3 side. And 502 a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The dispensing base unit 550 is a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-like ball tank attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the form of a groove opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  Payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 for guiding gaming balls B from tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, and one for gaming balls B induced by ball guidance unit 570 based on instructions from payout control board 633. Dispensing device 580 each, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B passed through the dispensing device 580 downward, the gaming ball B through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the back surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the back side of the base unit 620b. 620 c, a payout control unit 620 d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620 c, and an interface unit 620 e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620 a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a plurality of door frame wedges 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame ridge 652 or the outer frame ridge 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame ridge 652 downward. A lock spring 655 which biases and presses the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 which moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Main unit frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame, and FIG. 83 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guiding member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front to the rear, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide the connecting cable 503 And a game board lock member 505 rotatably mounted on a lower portion of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 in an attachable and detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion slot 501b which penetrates back and forth in the height range of the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b is formed, and the game board on which the game board 5 is placed A placement board 501c, and a game board regulation part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left and right and backward.

  Further, the main frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front of the base main body 501a in the front view, and the launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540; It penetrates back and forth in the cylinder insertion port 501f which penetrates back and forth in the front view right side of the part 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth in the front view lower left side of the game board placement part 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward under the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. The cable attachment recess 501 h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached and the positive of the cable attachment recess 501 h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the front right side of the gaming board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 640 is at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the rear extension portion 501j rotatably mounted and the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a, and for mounting the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably mounted on the main body frame base 501 at a position below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b, thereby making the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b removable.

  The cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is attached to the right of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501 h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 protrudes forward in the upper and lower sides of a flat guide body 502a extending in the left and right direction, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are extended, a cylindrical attachment shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right ends of the guide main body 502a And a plurality of through holes 502d aligned in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connecting cable guiding member 502 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501 h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 etc., the connection cable guiding member 502 is an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 by the connection cable guide member. In a state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide main body 502a so as to extend leftward from the right side of the guide main body 502a of 502, the lateral direction is the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being clamped together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 which penetrated to the pair of through-holes 502d of the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 in a state where the assembly door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and the door frame relay board cover It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed to the left of the left end of the connection cable guiding member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the open angle α of the door frame 3 and the open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies: α / 2 ≧ β (desirably, α / 3 ≧ β) (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guiding member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α becomes larger, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees) Transition as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward relative to the main body frame base 501. The guiding of the connection cable 503 can prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 is relatively moved backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guiding member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guiding member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, since the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guiding member 502 is folded 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connecting cable 503 is folded at the folded part. You can put on a bribe. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the force for closing the connection cable 503 is acted upon by the fold when the 180-folded portion of the connection cable 503 is changed to open. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) from moving in the opening direction by its fold, and the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the side of the door frame 3, the cable holder 103a is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guiding member 502, and the door rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 centering on the central axes (axial centers) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126. A tangent line contacting a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) projecting backward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and an angle of 45 degrees crossing the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is configured to be as follows. Thereby, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the tip end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 opened through the connection cable 503. Since it is possible to press in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 which rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Main frame upper hinge member]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  An upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511 And a main frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically in the front view left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 at a horizontally extending portion, and the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 Have.

  A portion of the upper hinge main body 511 which is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501 k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted in the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 can be mounted so that the main frame 4 can be hinged rotatably relative to the outer frame 2 in cooperation with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520, and the door frame relative to the main frame 4 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape upward And a lower hinge second body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate material extending horizontally is bent in an L shape upward. The lower horizontal hinge assembly 520 is provided with a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 at a distance from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower portion thereof. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below for the outer frame It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a at the left side of the horizontally extending portion, for restricting the pivoting range of the door frame 3; And. The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 5011 of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. Be The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the main frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main frame 4. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 81, FIG. 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The cross-sectional shape in plan view of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed in a U shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion material.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted forward and upward to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position control members 531 are vertically spaced apart and attached.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a which is open to the right and extends vertically, on the front side formed in a U shape in which the right side is opened in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove 530 a is such that the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing flail 111 meanders in a plan view, and an incorrect tool from the left side of the pachinko machine 1 Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door unit 3 is attached to the main unit 4 It is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can strike the gaming ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 541 in a front view From around the tip of the hitting ball 543, a shooting solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose axis extends forward through the shooting base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the shooting solenoid 542, and The game ball B is mounted on the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward and to the left, and the game ball B is rollable.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feed unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544 When the handle 182 is turned in the state where it is in motion, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hit ball 543. The game ball B hit by the hitting ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rails 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002) Between the two, it falls to the ball socket 150 c of the lower far cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the far cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Disbursement base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. Fig. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as viewed from the rear. Dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of main body frame base unit 500.

  The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side in front view of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same width as that of the top plate portion 551a and is shortened short, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a And a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b Back plate left portion 551e and inner plate portion 551f extending backward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left side plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left side plate portion 551b to the right Extend to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and in an L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the lateral direction substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the game board slot 501b of the main frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is the upper and lower sides of the game board slot 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the direction height. The front end of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c of the dispensing base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion which is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the portion is dispensed Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner side plate portion 551 f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551 i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  Dispensing base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of top plate portion 551a of dispensing base 551 and extends in the left and right box-like ball tank 552 opened upward, and the portion of dispensing base 551 extending in the left and right And a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 at the upper side and extending in the form of a groove opened upward to the left.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 on the left side of the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction, A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553 and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 And a ball stopper 557 attached near the left end in the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left and right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left and right direction, and the front and rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front and rear direction Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached on the upper surface of the top plate 551 a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 at the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the top surface of the top plate 551 a of the dispensing base 551 with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is approximately one minute from the depth at which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonal to the left and back from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 and several times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B After extending so as to be depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left at a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guiding passage 570 a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the left end. It inclines so that the left end side becomes low at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. In addition, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the tank rail 553 at the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from spreading or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to the axis about which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction It is rotatably mounted. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in two stages in the upper and lower directions is delayed by the rectifying pieces 556a, and the flow is rectified in the downstream side to flow in the tank rail 553 Even if the height is lowered, it does not clog the ball.

  The ball stopper 557 is mounted slidably in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 in the front view, and by sliding left, the bottom end opening of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from circulating from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  Furthermore, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 in a front view on the top surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 is provided with a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the payout unit]
The entire configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear is there. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the gaming ball B disposed under the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570 A payout device 580 for paying out one at a time based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B having passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned by the tank rails 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pullout passage 580b is operated from the ball pulling lever 593 to the upper full ball passage unit The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the gaming ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the gaming ball B discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, receives the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 and guides the gaming ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is to do.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-like guiding unit base 571 having a meanderingly extending guiding passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is opened forward, and a front side of the guiding unit base 571 closed. The game ball B in the guide passage 570a is detected by detecting the movement of the flat guide channel front lid 572 and the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a. And a ball-off detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front cover 572 in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The induction passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the induction unit base 571 and extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the induction unit base 571 and then bends to the right It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the width of the unit base 571 and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

  The guiding passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front and rear right and the width in the right and left direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the gaming ball B is distributed. It can be guided in one row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the movable piece member 573 is mounted to be able to move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a near the top. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side in a front view of the guide passage 570a, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight It is formed to be. In this movable piece member 573, when the gaming ball B is in contact with the portion projecting into the guiding passage 570a, the projecting portion is pushed by the gaming ball B and does not protrude backward from the inside of the guiding passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guiding passage 570a, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from inside the guiding passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the gaming ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non detection state when the gaming ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is a dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It is in communication with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B extends in a serpentine manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many gaming can be performed in the guiding passage 570a. The ball B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90 (a) is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is open, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view of It is. Dispensing device 580 is removably attached to the underside of ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of back plate left portion 551e of dispensing base 551 of dispensing base unit 550 from the rear.

  The payout device 580 has a box-like opening in the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can be distributed and a payout device main body 581 having a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a It has a flat-plate-like dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-like dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, and the rotating shaft is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583; The second transmission gear 587 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 and the second transmission gear 587 Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a plurality of detection pieces 588 b extending outward from the spur gear-like dispensing gear 588 a and the dispensing gear 588 a A plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the discharge gear member 588 between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device back cover 582 are provided. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the discharge device main body 581 and detecting a detection piece 588b of the discharge gear member 588.

  Furthermore, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects the gaming ball B, and after the payout device main body 581 and the payout device The ball extraction movable piece 592 mounted so as to be able to open and close the ball extraction passage 580b at a site branched from the ejection passage 580a by the lid 582 and the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be held at the position where the ball extraction passage 580b is closed. And a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a plan view. The dispensing device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger in the front view right than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position near the left from the center in the lateral direction, and the downstream end is at a position near the right end in the lateral direction. It opens downward. Dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height from the upper end so as to move little by little leftward, and after bending slightly diagonally downward from the upper side, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589. Then, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B above the center of the dispensing blade 589, a gap slightly larger than the gaming ball B with the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 It extends downward in a circular arc concentric with the discharge blade 589 so as to be formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right of the rear view from the center of the discharge blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches off at a portion bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side in a rear view to the lower end in the rear view of the bottom surface It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball B A main body side guide wall 581a which protrudes backward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap than the other, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall in back view of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removing passage 580b And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and are a back view of a portion extending to the right in a rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the dispensing device body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in a rear view. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588 b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device back cover 582. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending in the dispensing passage 580a from the upper side to the rotational axis and then extending to the right in the rear view. And protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc having a radius larger than the radius of the gaming ball B to the center side, between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can restrict movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. Thus, the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially integrally rotatably mounted by the dispensing device rear lid 582 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left in the rear view of the rotation shaft of the delivery gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the discharge gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the discharge blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the back and forth direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces in the dispensing passage 580a. The depth of the ball removal movable piece 592 is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a Through the gap between the two, and may be projected into the ball removal passage 580b or retracted out of the ball removal passage 580b.

  The ball extracting lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear view left in the vicinity of the upper end of the ball extracting movable piece 592. A part of the ball extraction lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lowering end, the lower portion can be in contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580 b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. See 90).

  When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the gaming ball B, which is in a state like beading on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592 is Flow to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the gaming ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the discharge passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is nothing like the payout wing 589 for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball B, so the gaming ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down too early.

  As described above, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the gaming ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball extraction passage 580b, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispenser main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispenser rear lid 582 Since the ball pullout movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball pullout passage 580b by the contact force since it can move to the outer side than the inner surface of the ball pullout passage 580b, the ball pullout movable piece 592 is The game ball B is not pinched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From such a thing, since it is possible to make the ball removal movable piece 592 hard to break, more gaming balls B can be discharged faster to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the ball extraction passage 580b passes between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a at intervals where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is narrower than the gaming ball B. In order to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, the game ball B is in contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b so that the ball removal movable piece 592 has a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B is moved to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, Only the game ball B can prevent outward movement by the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the gaming ball B to the outside is blocked between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the gaming ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball thereafter Since the movement of the pullout movable piece 592 is due to an inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pullout movable piece 592, and the ball pullout movable piece 592 can be made hard to break and the main body side guide The gaming ball B does not protrude to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the gaming ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is to be emitted downward from the payout device 580 and guide the gaming ball B to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-like upper full tank base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened at the rear side, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side open. And a dispenser pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the top full-tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispenser 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601 a for attaching a back cover.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 600 is an upper discharge that opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side to a position about 2/3 the height from the lower side. It is in communication with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper discharging ball receiving passage 600a and extends about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the full height An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper normal discharge passage 600c An upper full tank delivery passage 600d extending downward from the front right side from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the upper surface And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank passage unit 600, the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left in front view. The upper full ball passage unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the gaming ball B released (disbursed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b to form the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. It is discharged downward from any of the The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate 551g of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball channel unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full-tan ball passage unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank passage unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. And a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward at the front end of the lower full tank base 611, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 which can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end opening of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b And a closing spring 614 which is biased.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b extend forward in a side-by-side manner, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. The lower full tank delivery passage 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal delivery passage 610a. The lower ball removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the longitudinal direction.

  The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream end) of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. Opening is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an operating protrusion 613 a protruding forward. The actuating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a front view, and as the front end face approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction It is inclined to project forward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a is formed to abut on the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the wafer cover unit 150 in the door frame 3.

  In the lower full tank unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are opened upward at the rear upper end, are assembled into the upper full at the upper end of the lower unit. It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue passage unit 600. Thereby, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is the lower full payout passage 610b. , And the game balls B discharged downward from the upper ball-opening passage 600e flow in the lower ball-opening passage 610c.

  Further, when the lower full-tank passage unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal delivery passage 610 a and the lower full delivery passage 610 b pass through the fal cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is opened immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receptacle 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610 c is opened to face the ball extraction guide 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in the normal state (the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the actuating projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing of the fal cover unit 150. By being in contact with the portion 150f, the plate is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. Thus, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are opened, and are communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving hole 150b of the far cover unit 150. It is in the state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the fall cover unit 150. Is pivoted in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the gaming balls B in the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b can not move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7 e. Flow of gaming balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the gaming balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lowering end, and the ball pulling passage 580 b branched from the discharging passage 580 a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

  A predetermined number of ball tanks 552, which are open upwards, are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example. A game ball B is supplied. The gaming balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 through the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 in a state of being aligned by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the gaming ball B can not move (flow downward) downstream of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of gaming balls B stagnate upstream of the payout blade 589 It becomes.

  Then, the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball breakage detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the gaming ball B is stored in the passage from at least the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the dispensing blade 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the dispensing motor 584, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a It is released downstream of 589. Then, the gaming balls B discharged from the dispensing blade 589 (the ball accommodating portion 589 b) are sent to the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600 after being detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591.

  The gaming ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passing unit 600 is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. Then, the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600 c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610 a of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate-ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 in the case of FIG.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 becomes full with the game balls B, the game balls B can not be released forward from the upper ball feed opening 211a, so the payout device When the game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal discharge passage 610a of the lower full tank passage unit 610 and the game ball B is further discharged, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the communicating upper full ball passage unit 600. Then, when the gaming ball B is further dispensed in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the gaming balls B, the upper normal ball storage passage 600b communicated on the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is stored. The gaming ball B starts to stagnate, and the gaming ball B starts to flow to the upper full payout path 600d side adjacent to the upper regular payout path 600c.

  Then, the gaming ball B that has flowed down to the upper full discharge passage 600 d passes through the lower full discharge passage 610 b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and fills the full ball receptacle 150 b in the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Received by Thereafter, the gaming balls B received in the full tank receptacle 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. As a result, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The gaming ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full with gaming balls B (( The player is informed that the container is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected.

  When discharging the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descent end Slide it to the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a , And is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, in the region of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581 a and the rear lid side guide wall 582 a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592. Is less likely to break.

  The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, the ball ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 pass through the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 Discharged to the island facilities side of

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the bottom rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The base unit 620 is a main unit frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a and the speaker unit 620a attached to the lower side than the game board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main unit frame base 501 in the main unit frame base unit 500. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the front end of the speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501. And a container-like speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker attachment portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view and extending in the vertical direction, and a front surface of the speaker attachment portion 621a A space front recess 621b recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side and a space protruding downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extending in the lateral direction and directed diagonally backward And an open connection portion 621c.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 . The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container opened forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most greatly, and is stepped backward in a step-wise manner as it goes right It is formed so that the protrusion of. As a result, a space on the rear side to the right of the center in the front view of the speaker box 623 can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620 b, the power supply unit 620 c, and the like can be disposed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621 c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has the space front concave portion 621b which bulges forward in the front view right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the enclosure 624 protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 goes to the right The space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is secured sufficiently wide even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount.

  In the speaker unit 620 a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylindrical portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48. And the inner space 40a of the outer plate 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a large space enclosure 624 can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622 The sound that has been output can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space (a part of the enclosure 624) behind the main body frame speaker 622 is extended to the right in front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made with the outer frame lower assembly 40 through the connection tube portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound outputted from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. The sound can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted low frequency band can be resonated and amplified by passing the two port members 47 and can be emitted forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-reversed state, and therefore, it is outputted from the front of the main frame speaker 622 to be a dish unit The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the aperture of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which heavy bass sounds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass. Thus, a sound emitted from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211 b of the dish unit 200 and a sound emitted from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 Allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through cylinder 623a which extends in a cylindrical shape and communicates with the through hole 621d is formed. In the assembled state of the speaker unit 620 a, the through hole 621 d and the through cylinder 623 a communicate with each other, and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620 b of the board unit 620 is attached to the front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620 c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full-tank passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 guiding rightward and a discharge ball receiving portion receiving the gaming ball B which is opened upward on the right side in a front view on the downstream side of the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and which is discharged downward from the game board 5 628, and a ball outlet 629 for discharging the gaming ball B which has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharging ball receiver 628 downward.

  The upstream end of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 is opened leftward in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and the downstream end is opened on the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610 The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends in the left and right direction. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 at the left end in a front view, and is inclined so as to be lower toward the right side.

  The base unit 620b guides the game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628, Since the sheet is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, the space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction can be easily secured widely in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be enlarged, and the player can hear sounds with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

  The power supply unit 620 c of the substrate unit 620 includes a power supply substrate 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620 b and a power supply substrate cover attached to the rear base 626 to cover the rear side of the power supply substrate 630 And 631.

  The dispensing control unit 620d includes a box-like dispensing control substrate box 632 detachably mounted on the rear side of the power supply substrate cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control substrate 633 housed in the dispensing control substrate box 632 (see FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 according to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Then, the game balls B of the instructed number are to be paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The dispensing control board box 632 is formed to leave a trace of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhances the deterrence against fraud.

  The interface unit 620 e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620 a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. And an interface substrate cover 636 attached to the substrate base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to the rearmost portion of the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 on the rear surface of the speaker box 623. The interface board 635 is connected to an end of one (the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface substrate 635 is connected to a power supply substrate 630, a payout control substrate 633, a main control substrate, a peripheral control substrate, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface substrate cover 636 extends to the right in a front view more than the substrate base 634 (interface substrate 635) so as to cover a part of the dispensing control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion slot 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end of the rear extension of the rear extension 501 j of the main body frame base 501 on the right side in a front view, and the left side is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the back plate upper portion 551 d in the assembled state. It is formed to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating vertically and longitudinally. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 4 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 projecting forward from the unit base 651. A door frame wedge 652, a plurality of outer frame wedges 653 projecting backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and forward projecting from the lower end of the front end of the unit base 651 And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the locking unit 650 biases the door frame collar 652 downward and the outer frame collar 653 upward as compared to the lock spring 655 and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. And an outer frame unlocking lever 656 for moving the outer frame collar 653 downward by protruding forward from the upper position and sliding it downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of door frame ridges 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward of the front surface of the main frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, whereby the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The transmission member 133 is engaged, and rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame wedges 652 are locked to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) The frame collar 653 is locked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, inserts a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130, and when rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, a plurality of transmission cylinders 654 The door frame wedge 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame collars 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame wedges 653 move downward, and the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip end sides of the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the main frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing the upper portion of the main body frame in a rear perspective view. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state in which a tank rail and the like are assembled in a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory view showing a region where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame are circulated. FIG. 104 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory view showing the flow of the gaming ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 is insertable into the outer frame 2 by the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, and the rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped attached along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main frame base 501 A dispensing base 551 and a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container form) extending to the left and right, attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward The tank rail 553 extending to the left in the form of a groove, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554 A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the rail 553; a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the lens 553 and a payout device 580 mounted on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 and for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player And.

  The ball tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape whose plan view shape extends in the left and right direction, and is inclined from the front side and the rear side of the bottom wall 552a which is inclined so that the left side is low in front view. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container whose upper side is open. It is done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552 f is about 3⁄4 the length of the front wall 552 b in the left-right direction from the end side of the left wall 552 d to the end of the opposite side (right wall 552 e side) in the front wall 552 b. It is formed over the ridge.

  The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 at the right end side (upstream side) in front view, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552 . The tank rail 553 extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom portion, and has a bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined to be lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view It has a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction and moves parallel to the axis extending from the right end to the left end so as to move backward toward the end . In the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a portion extending parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right, extending to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail at the upper end of this portion With the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 attached, the upper side is closed. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the gaming ball B at the downstream end Is formed at a height allowing only one flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the plurality of gaming balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the gaming balls B A bulging portion 553b which is bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a There is. The plurality of gaming balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned by the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes to the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower as it goes from the upper end side to the main guiding portion 553a below. Because of this, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of gaming balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. In the bulging portion 553b, the center of the curved curvature is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b is slightly Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curvature thereof is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Because of this, in the gaming ball B that circulates the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts is in accordance with the position of the bulging portion 553b that contacts. It will change in various directions, and can suppress generation | occurrence | production of a ball | bowl on the inside of the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a constant extending shape, a reaction force always acts on the gaming ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction. Because it becomes difficult to disperse the reaction force, it is difficult for the game ball B to escape by always pressing the internal game ball B in a fixed direction, and it becomes easy to generate a ball clog (ball seam). On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b becomes different depending on the position of the game ball B, so the inside is circulated By dispersing the pressed directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and it is possible to make it difficult to generate a ball clog (ball game).

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured to be able to visually recognize the inside from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball seam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be viewed from the outside, so a ball clogged location can be identified quickly. can do. Therefore, since clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, interruption of the game due to the occurrence of clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to interruption of the game The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, it is possible to visually recognize the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 through the tank rail 553 from behind. When a movable malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit etc., with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, the status of the drive motor, transmission mechanism such as gear or belt can be checked, as above The effects and effects of

  The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction is outside the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return to the ball tank 552 the gaming ball B which extends to the left (left) and overflows from the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side. And the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is low, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 is A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 out of both the left and right sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the gaming ball Provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the side opposite to the detour passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 opened at the upper side than the upper portion is open Covers the upper side of an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a which can be connected with electric wiring from the rear, and a plurality of the wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflowing surface portion 501m is a flat plate from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically to the rear from a position low by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B It is extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501 It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about 1/2 the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball B. In this overflow surface portion 501m, in a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between it and the outer frame upper member 30. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m; The upper end of the left step 501n and the right step 501o is higher than the left step 501n and the right step 501o in the left and right direction, and the upper end extends in the front and back direction in a band plate shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals smaller than the diameter. The left step portion 501 n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501 n is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. A gap between the two is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the left step coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o coincides with the right wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

  The bypass passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left wall 552d, and the right wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left from the outside, and is a passage surface 552h inclined such that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower And a ridge portion extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552 d in the passage surface 552 h to the same height as the left side wall 552 d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side (the collar 552i side) of the rear end side It extends diagonally to move forward as it goes from the to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left and right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left and right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the gaming ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552 g changes from the rear end, which is oblique, so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the bypass passage 552 g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553. The game ball B from can be received. In addition, since game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the tank rail by the game balls B from the bypass passage 552 g It is possible to make it difficult to cause ball clogging in 553.

  The detour passage 552 g extends obliquely with respect to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves rearward as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 is reached, so the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 side. At the time of discharge, the obliquely extending rear end allows the gaming ball B to be discharged to the upstream side which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed, and the width It is possible to suppress the generation of the ball seam in the tank rail 553 by releasing it to the wide area of

  Further, in the tank rail 553, a portion for guiding the gaming ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the rear side 552c in a front view. In this part, the gaming ball B which has descended from the inside of the ball tank 552 below the guide surface 552 j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552 k) is distributed. Because of this, the height of the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553 in the portion behind the detour passage 552 g in the tank rail 553 Never exceed height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant) where game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. Thus, the game balls B induced to the rear side can be reliably received by the tank rails 553, and the game balls B will not spill backward from the tank rails 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate extending in the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d so as to be lower from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552 j of The guide surface portion 552 j extends from the front wall 552 b to the rear wall 552 c in the front-rear direction. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j has a right end side from the left end of the front wall 552 b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552 b in the left and right direction in front view After being obliquely extended to about 1/9 of the total length from the front wall 552b to about one half of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in parallel to the rear wall 552c, extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction.

  The ball tank 552 is a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface 552j formed in the above shape in plan view, the end on the front wall 552b side of the right end and the end on the rear wall 552c The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. The ball tank 552 is a flat flange extending in the lateral direction outward and in the vertical direction on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the flange 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 551l. The ball tank 552 has the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l have the height of the left end wall 552d or the upper end edge of the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501 Of the left step portion 501 n and the right step portion 501 o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552 k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side are positioned behind the ball tank 552 )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge unit 551 j is formed on the top surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551 j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be lowered stepwise backward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552 a of the ball tank 552 when assembled in the main body frame 4. A position where the top of the tank rail 553 is higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction) It extends to the rear and then extends to a nearby position).

  The external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface with the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a aligned in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal which can hold the tip of the electric wiring by opening the holding portion by the operation of the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in an assembled state in the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the top surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, in the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 103, the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower at the rear end side. The left step 501 n is inclined so that the rear right corner is lower, and the right step 501 o is lower so that the rear left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side is lower in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552 a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of gaming balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the overflowing portion 552 f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper end edges is exceeded It can be made to flow out to the outside (forward) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501m and made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress that the game balls B strongly push each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called, ball seam) due to the engagement between the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back pressure from acting strongly on the game ball B in the ball tank 552 by the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m, and clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 Can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m may spill out on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a problem that the game ball B spilled to the outside of the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 can not be opened or closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, since the height of the upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thus, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m is the left side of one side of the ball tank 552 By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the return from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the gaming ball B on the bypass passage 552g side presses the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 to hold the ball It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the gaming ball B rolls on the bypass passage 552g) Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent the inflow of gaming balls B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g, the flow of the gaming balls B in the bypass passage 552g is behind the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side The flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side can be made, and the pressure of the gaming ball B guided from the bypass passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be made in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the gaming balls B become different, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming balls B from pushing each other and biting each other, and the clogging of the gaming balls B is generated. It can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the gaming balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned since they are lined up, the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided at a portion of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side, the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a Since the change is made to coincide with each other, the plurality of gaming balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, the upper part of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the channel through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The number of steps in the height direction is reduced by circulating the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in multiple steps in the height direction in the lower direction through the portion of the tank rail 553 which is closed on the upper side, thereby reducing the number of steps in the height direction Can be aligned to Therefore, the plurality of gaming balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in one row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of gaming balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Thus, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more gaming balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected on the opposite side to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or vigorously supplies in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a etc. There is no occurrence of a short circuit or an electrical wiring disconnection due to the contact of the game ball B.

  The game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552 since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, it is difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, and it is difficult to drop from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such problems.

  Further, the gaming ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guiding surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the guiding surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface 552 j can be prevented from pressing in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552 Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, due to their inclination, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, and a problem occurs because the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B circulates from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface 552 j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant) where the gaming ball B can be stacked upward can be secured. The gaming ball B induced by the bypass passage 552 g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are disposed in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 closed on the upper side, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 to cause a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The entire configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board in which the front component, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the front component, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 107 taken along the line C-C. FIG. 115 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the face of the gaming panel to show the inside of the gaming area where the gaming balls circulate and the obstacle nail.

  In the following, when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is rectangular, it indicates that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative substrate (side view LED) The detailed description is omitted.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. General winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B in the game area 5a, first start opening 2002, gate section 2003, a second start opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a second opening win 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening in the gaming area 5a. In order to be accepted or passed in 2006 etc., the game is performed to enjoy the operation of hitting the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the back of the front component 1000 and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115 etc.) in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a part of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is to be in the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 190 etc.) for controlling the content.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player's side so as to be visible to the player in the upper left corner of the front component 1000; A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the 1100, an effect display device 1600 disposed on the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a rear side of the gaming panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive substrate unit 1700 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 etc.) to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  Drive board unit 1700 is provided in front unit 2000 and back unit 3000 according to a command from panel control board 1510 relaying the connection between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral control board 1510. The display substrate includes an effect drive substrate 1720 for driving a decorative substrate, a drive motor, a drive solenoid and the like, and a drive substrate box 1730 accommodating the panel relay substrate 1710 and the effect drive substrate 1720. The drive substrate box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 in the rear side on the left side, and is removably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side in the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball B inserted into the gaming area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B; The second start opening 2004 and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 can receive the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening that can receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B. 2004 Includes the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is the lottery by accepting game balls B, and.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and is provided at an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the inside of the game area 5a and in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. And the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the game area 5a from the inside of the game area 5a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start opening 2002 and a front surface of the start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 at the left of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided slightly above the left side of the front view of the side unit 2200 2300 and provided on the right of the front view opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a as the front view lower right corner and having a second start opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 The front of the game area 5a above the first attacking unit 2400 and the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200. A frame-shaped center character 2500 provided approximately at the center slightly above and a second large winning opening 2006 provided on the right of the center character 2500 above the first attachment unit 2400. A side right middle unit 2700 and a side right middle unit 2700 provided above the second attacking unit 2600 and the second attacking unit 2600 and having one general winning opening 2001 and the second sub-out port 2012 And a gate member 2800 provided with the gate portion 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower portion of the front end in the back box 3010 and the flat back left front decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 provided respectively near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The back induction unit 3050, the back-rear rendering unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back induction unit 3050 at the lower part in the back box 3010 are provided separately left and right A back down left rendering unit 3200 and a back down right rendering unit 3250, and a back down inside rendering unit 3300 provided behind the back down left rendering unit 3200 and the back down right rendering unit 3250 in the back box 3010; Have.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back front left decoration 3030 in the back box 3010 and the back up rendering unit 3400 provided in front of the back back rendering unit 3100 in the upper part in the back box 3010 The back rear left rendering unit 3500, the back rear right rendering unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, the back front left decoration 3030 in the back box 3010, and the back left A back front left rendering unit 3700 provided between the rendering unit 3500 and a back front right rendering unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right rendering unit 3600 in the back box 3010 And 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back.

  The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lower toward the rear (outlet 2010).

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and abuts against the game ball B rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 2010 which penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction in the frame. In the out slot 2010, two game balls B penetrate with a sufficient width in the left-right direction. The game ball B induced to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detecting member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and an inner portion of the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear projection 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. This notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch and the lower full ball path The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 are adapted to face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparent in its entirety, and the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front. Since this front component 1000 is formed transparent with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce clear visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. While being able to give the player a sense of openness, the size of the actual playing area 5a does not change, but the playing area 5a can be made large (wide) for the player.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 is made transparent with the game panel 1100, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player). It can be made to appear to emit light by doing so, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is assumed. In the present embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left and right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge, respectively, in the plurality of positioning holes formed in the round hole and the short long hole penetrating in the front and rear direction. And a plurality of engagement steps whose thickness is thin. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  In the panel plate 1110, as shown in FIG. 116, the large opening 1112 for attaching the center character 2500 is offset to the upper right from the center in a front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the gaming ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side It has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B can not be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step having a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. A through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a notch portion 1122 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to coincide with the notch portion 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion to lower The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank passage unit 610 are arranged to face forward.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 which extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed forward from the rear surface. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 is in communication with the out port 2010. The cylindrical portion 3081 of the out-ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 described later is inserted into the out recess 1123.

  Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is disposed outside the holding step and a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding step and inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 respectively. And the three engaging claws resiliently engaged with the engagement steps on the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 projecting upward from the lower outside of the holding step And a pair of engagement pieces respectively engaged with the two engagement steps on the lower side of the housing. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from the front upper side, moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 backward, and inclines the upper side and the lower left By elastically engaging the engagement step portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is located with the engagement claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Since the game panel 1100 is formed transparent with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce clear visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, While the player can be given an open feeling and the size of the actual game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made large (wide) to the player.

  Further, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player). It can be made to appear to emit light by doing so, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 which is notched rearward from the front end at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state to the game board 5 and A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  With the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the back unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges the discharge ball 1201 formed on the bottom to the discharge ball receiver 628 below. Can.

5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 112 to FIG. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 190) for controlling the game contents and payout of the game ball B, and the main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the substrate holder 1200. And have.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first large winning opening sensor 2402, a second large winning opening The sensor 2601, the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, the second sub-out sensor 3054, and the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, and 35055 are connected.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result and the like.

  The function display unit 1400 displays a normal lottery result in which the detailed illustration is omitted, and the shin is a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming state and the game ball B is passed by the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball B at the gate section 2003 are provided.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball B, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special hold number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 indicates the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit" or the like. It has a round indicator, which consists of five LEDs to display.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 110, FIG. 113, and FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 has a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 190) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control substrate 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative substrates on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can visually recognize from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5.

  The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and has a width substantially the same as the width of the back wall in the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 projecting upward from the upper end surface, and one lower fixing piece 1602 projecting downward from the lower end surface. In the effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen directed forward, the two fixed grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner circumferential surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the lower fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the back. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And project rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B The second start-up port 2004 where the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, and the first start-up port 2002 or the second start-up port 2004 The first special winning opening 2005 and the first special winning opening 2005 are different from the first special winning opening 2005 which allows the receiving of the gaming ball B according to the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B position It is provided, and the reception of game ball B becomes possible according to the 1st special lottery result or the 2nd special lottery result which is drawn by reception of game ball B to 1st starting opening 2002 or 2nd starting opening 2004 It has two major winning openings 2006.

  Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the horizontal center in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a It is arranged above the center. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 2010 at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed at a height of about 3⁄4 from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed at a height slightly higher than the general winning a prize port 2001 at the lower right corner of the game area 5a. The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second large winning opening 2006 is disposed above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right.

  The first sub-out port 2011 is disposed below the second start port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is disposed on the right of the general winning port 2001 on the right.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start opening 2002 and a front surface of the start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 at the left of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided slightly above the left side of the front view of the side unit 2200 2300 and provided on the right of the front view opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a as the front view lower right corner and having a second start opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 The front of the game area 5a above the first attacking unit 2400 and the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200. A frame-shaped center won game 2500 provided substantially at the center slightly above closer, and a.

  Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is provided on the right of the center character 2500 above the first attachment unit 2400 and has a second large winning opening 2006, and a second attachment unit 2600 and a second attachment unit 2600. And a gate portion 2003 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and the side right middle unit 2700 provided above the side and having one general winning opening 2001 and second sub-out port 2012. And a gate member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. Fig. 118 (a) is a front perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit in the front unit, and Fig. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit in the front unit from the rear. ) Is a left side view of the starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory view in which the inclination of the front of the general winning opening is compared with the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the starting opening unit and the side unit in the game board. The starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 2010 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 which is always open upward with a width which allows only one gaming ball B to be received.

  The starting opening unit 2100 includes a front wall 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (the game panel 1100), a peripheral wall 2102 extending backward from the peripheral edge of the front wall 2101, and a peripheral wall 2102 A flat plate-like flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction is provided, and the whole is formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, which is a combination of a rectangular portion long in left and right and a semicircular portion having the lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in a bowl shape whose upper portion is opened. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and the gaming ball B can be guided to the rear.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending in the lateral direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The start opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, and the first start opening 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward than the panel plate 1110 is displayed. It is formed.

  When the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the first starting opening 2002 protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100 and then is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center character 2500 Located just below the center of the Therefore, when the gaming ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  Starting port unit 2100 guides gaming ball B received in first starting port 2002 to the rear of game panel 1100 by the inclination of bowl-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102 in a state of being attached to game panel 1100, and back unit 3000 Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back induction unit 3050. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back induction unit 3050 is detected by the first start port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Although illustration is omitted, a decorative seal is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so as to be more prominent than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be urged to perform the hitting operation of the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002. In addition to being able to receive the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002, a lottery of special lottery results (first special lottery results) in which an advantageous gaming state in which a player such as a "big hit" game is advantageous occurs. Since the user is given the expectation of the special lottery result selected by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002, the player's interest can be suppressed from being lowered.

  In this starting opening unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 for guiding the gaming ball B backward is inclined at a loose angle (closer to the horizontal angle) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Because of this, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B to the rear is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002, the received game ball B can be viewed for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, so While being able to make it recognize certainly that game ball B was received by the 1st starting opening 2002, pleasure (a sense of superiority) for the game ball B being received by the 1st starting opening 2002, general winning a prize opening 2001 Can be tasted for a longer time than was accepted by

  In addition, in a state where the starting opening unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back-to-back effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is positioned at the back, and is provided to the back-to-back effect unit 3300 The light is decorated by light from LEDs such as the first decoration substrate 3322 and the second decoration substrate 3329 in the back of the back decoration unit 3320.

  Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the starting opening unit 2100, a rib may be provided to straddle the front wall 2201 of the first starting opening 2002 and the bottom of the peripheral wall 2102. This rib is formed in a triangle (a part of which may be rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined at the first front wall 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right side in the side unit 2200. And incline at approximately the same angle, and the distance to the upper end of the first front wall 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200. (The position of the rib is below the inclined portion of the first front wall 2203). Thus, the game ball B received by the general winning hole 2001 in the first front wall portion 2203 is a timing at which the game ball B received by the first start opening 2002 abuts against the rib and is guided backward. It is possible to make it later than the timing when it abuts on the inclined portion and is guided backward, and the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 in which the game ball B is always open. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are opened upward, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are opened toward the upper left.

  The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate, and a pair of second base members extending in the form of a bowl from the base plate in the form of a bowl and inclined so as to move rearward as the front end goes downward. The first front wall which closes the front end side of each of the first induction rods and the first front wall which closes the front end sides of the first induction rods, and extends like a weir in the left and right of the two first induction rods. And a second front wall closing the front end side of the second guiding rod. The side unit 2200 is formed of a transparent member as a whole.

  The first induction rod 2202 and the second induction rod 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first induction weir 2202 has the U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second induction weir 2204 has the U-shaped open portion directed to the upper left. The front end of the first induction rod 2202 extends vertically at the upper side bordering on a part at a height of about 3⁄4 from the lower side, and near the base plate 2201 so as to move rearward as the lower side goes downward. It extends diagonally. Therefore, the first front wall 2203 closing the front end side of the first induction rod 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a height of about 3⁄4 from the lower side.

  The front end side of the second induction rod 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall 2205 closing the front end side of the second guiding rod 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The game ball B can be received by the first front wall 2203 and the second front wall 2205 of a portion of the first induction rod 2202 and the second induction rod 2204 that protrudes forward beyond the panel plate 1110. The general winning combination 2001 is formed. Further, in a state where side unit 2200 is attached to panel plate 1110, a portion of first induction wedge 2202 and second induction wedge 2204 that protrudes rearward with respect to base plate 2201 penetrates opening 1112 of panel plate 1110. It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The first induction rods 2202 and the second induction rods 2204 are inclined so that the bottoms thereof are lower toward the rear, and can guide the gaming balls B received by the general winning opening 2001 to the rear.

  With the side unit 2200 assembled in the game board 5, three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the back delivery unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery openings 3064. The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063 and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back induction unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and Ejected onto substrate holder 1200.

  Unlike the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative seal attached to the first front wall 2203 and the second front wall 2205 that form the front of the general winning opening 2001. It is less noticeable than the first start opening 2002. In the two general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, since the front end is inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and the decorative seal is not attached to the front. The appearance does not get worse.

  When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, and the back lower left decoration in the back lower left rendering unit 3200 The light emitting decoration can be performed by the light from the LED of the substrate 3203, and the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. Further, side unit 2200 has a portion inclined to first front wall portion 2203 respectively forming the front ends of two general winning openings 2001, so that the lower back portion of back unit 3000 is left by the portion. The light emitted forward from the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the rendering unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) to the vicinity of the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make it look better.

  In the side unit 2200, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increased. The bottom surfaces of the first induction rod 2202 and the second induction rod 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B disappears in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first start hole 2002. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being drawn unnecessarily to the general winning opening 2001 while making the player surely recognize the acceptance of the game ball B to the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to other winning openings such as the next game ball B, the first starting opening 2002, the first large winning opening 2005, the second large winning opening 2006, etc. It is possible to enjoy the game in the game area 5a and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In other words, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. The rolling speed of the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the gaming ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002, the received game ball B can be viewed for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, so While being able to make it recognize certainly that game ball B was received by the 1st starting opening 2002, pleasure (a sense of superiority) for the game ball B being received by the 1st starting opening 2002, general winning a prize opening 2001 Can be tasted for a longer time than was accepted by

  By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, the first front wall 2203 is viewed from the side of the first induction rod 2202. It becomes possible for game ball B to pass ahead of the part which is inclined. When the game ball B passes the front of the first front wall 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap with the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so some gaming balls B may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001. An illusion is made that the payout of the game ball B is not made, and a sense of distrust to the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side is remembered, which may lower the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first induction rod 2202 are received by the general winning opening 2001 and moved backward. Since the player can visually recognize the induced game ball B for a short time, it can be recognized that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if the gaming ball B which has passed the front of the first front wall 2203 is illusion that it is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

  Further, in this side unit 2200, a portion of the game ball B is allowed to pass through the front of the first front wall portion 2203, so the game ball in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning hole 2001 is When B passes, most of the gaming balls B (at least half of the gaming balls B) overlap with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. It is possible to make an illusion as if it were received by the player, and to entertain the player. At this time, since a part of the gaming ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the gaming ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought as an illusion. Since it is possible, it is possible to avoid having a sense of mistrust in the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side even if a benefit (a payout of the game ball B or a lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter. It is possible to make the player continue to enjoy the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general winning opening 2001 among the three general winning openings 2001 in parallel to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the second front wall 2205. It has a shape similar to that of the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the leftmost general winning opening 2001, some players can be perceived as being accepted in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, which is illusion to be the starting opening, the lottery of the special lottery result is not performed, so remember the distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall side However, there is a risk that the general winnings port 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position which can not be accepted by the “right-handed”) away from the first starting port 2002 at the center in the lateral direction. At the same time, since the decorative seal for indicating the starting opening is not attached to the front of the second front wall 2205, it can be reconfirmed that it is not the starting opening and the player feels distrust Can reduce the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the side unit 2200 inclines the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 compared to the case where the front ends thereof are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the decorative seal is not attached to the front of the general winning opening 2001, the cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, although the inclination angle from the horizontal in the 1st front wall part 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning a prize opening 2001), illustration is omitted, variable winning a prize opening such as a big winning a prize opening or a prize winning a prize opening is closed so that opening and closing is possible. Is larger than the angle of inclination from the horizontal when the upper side is turned to the open side so that the upper side moves forward so that the game ball B is guided to the winning side. It is an angle. More specifically, when the number of gaming balls B paid out by the reception of gaming balls B to the variable winning opening is made larger than that of the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player, many of the gaming balls B to the variable winning opening Would like to win a prize. Alternatively, even if it is a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which the specified number of winnings is determined, the player wishes to win more than the specified number. Therefore, the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow by making the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening slower than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203). Therefore, as described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning hole, the received game ball B can be viewed for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001. On the other hand, it is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted to the variable winning opening, and to the general winning hole 2001, the pleasure (a feeling of superiority) for the game ball B being received to the variable winning opening. Can taste for a longer time than accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning opening door in the open state is loose, the time until the winning opening door in the open state is closed is long, so the number of gaming balls B is more than the prescribed number for the player. Can make you think.

  Further, in the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, a portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203 than the distance of the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end The distance is longer. As a result, since the corresponding winning opening is the general winning opening 2001, although the game balls B are paid out, the drawing such as the normal lottery or the special drawing is not performed, so the gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is Can be made invisible early from the player's view.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the side unit 2200, one of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 is shown in which the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 is inclined, but this is not a limitation. The front of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B fired at the launch position (so-called "left-handed") in the normal gaming state is allowed to enter the general winning opening 2001 whose front is not inclined. Although what was provided in the position was shown, it is not limited to this, and the general winning a prize port 2001 which does not incline the front is in the advantageous gaming state ("time reduction" or "certain change" or "big hit") The game ball B fired at the launch position (so-called "right-handed") may be provided at a position where it can enter the ball, or may be provided at both.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 provided with a slope on the front is more than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the special winning opening) is opened from when it is closed. It is a narrow angle. When the number of payouts of the game ball B when winning to the special winning opening is larger than that of the regular winning opening 2001, the player receives more than the prescribed number of winnings even if the special winning number is determined. I hope. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that has won the large winning opening rolls to the back side is considered to be slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won the general winning port 2001 that tilts the front is to the back side. There is. In other words, in the case of winning to the general winning a prize port 2001 which is smaller than the number of payouts when winning to the big winning a prize port, it is considered faster than the speed at which the game ball B winning to the big prize winning port rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the winning opening with more payouts has a slower time of disappearing from the player's view. As a result, a winning opening with more payouts can be provided with a longer time of joy when winning.

5-8 c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 inclined so as to be lower to the right. The side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

  In the side upper left unit 2300, the shelf 2301 projects forward of the front of the game panel 1100 in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 to the right side below the center character 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8 d. 1st Attacker Unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the first attachment unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the first attachment unit in the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attachment unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attachment unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory view showing, from the left side, the movement of the first special winning opening door in the first attacker unit. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing the passage of the gaming ball in the first attacking unit in cross section.

  The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, which is the lower right corner of the front view, from the front to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. It is attached. This first attacker unit 2400 is provided with a second start port 2004, a first big winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, the second start port 2004 is provided on the upper right side from the center in the left-right direction in front view, and the first large winning opening 2005 is on the left side from the center in the left-right direction It is provided at a low position, and the first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second start port 2004 at a position lower than the first big winning opening 2005.

  In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 detects the game ball B received by the second start hole 2004, and the first attack sensor 2401 detects the game ball B received by the first big winning hole 2005. A large winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received by the first sub-out port 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting an incorrect magnetism are provided. Two first big winning opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

  The first attachment unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, the front cover 2412 attached to the front of the unit base 2411 and forming the flow path of the game ball B, and attached to the back of the unit base 2411. The second start port door 2414 attached to the rear cover 2413 and the unit base 2411 that can close the second start port 2004 and the second start port door 2414 are moved to open and close the second start port 2004 First opening hole solenoid 2415 for making it possible, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the opening opening solenoid 2415, a first large winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first large winning opening 2005; For making one big winning opening door 2417 move and opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 Includes as one attacker solenoid 2418, the transmission member 2419 to the movable first winning opening the door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the.

  Also, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the back cover 2413 and attached to the first large winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for emitting and decorating the first large winning opening 2005, and to the back surface of the rear cover 2413, Second starting opening sensor 2401, first big winning opening sensor 2402, first sub out opening sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, starting opening solenoid 2415, first attachment solenoid 2418, and first big winning opening decoration board 2420 and panel relay board And a first relay relay substrate 2421 for relaying connection with the 1710.

  The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411 a penetrating in the front-rear direction near the upper end toward the right from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411 b penetrating in the front-rear direction below the first opening 2411 a, and a horizontal direction A second opening 2411c which passes through in the left and right direction in the upper left part from the center, two second guide holes 2411d which pass through in the left and right below the second opening 2411c, and And a first sub-out port 2011 which penetrates back and forth below the one induction hole 2411 b.

  The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed such that the width on the left and right is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door 2414a of the second start opening door 2414 is inserted. The first guiding hole 2411 b is provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411 b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The second opening 2411 c extends left and right by four to six times the diameter of the gaming ball B, and the door 2417 a of the first large winning opening door 2417 is inserted. Each of the second guide holes 2411 d protrudes cylindrically rearward, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lower.

  The unit base 2411 is also laterally aligned along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two contact portions 2411e projecting forward in a triangular shape. The contact portions 2411 e are the game balls B rolling on the door portion 2417 a of the first large winning opening door 2417 when the first large winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. It cooperates and distributes it in the shape of a large zigzag in the front-back direction.

  A second start port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 in a state in which the detection hole is projected forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411 immediately above the first guide hole 2411 b. Further, immediately above each of the two second guide holes 2411 d, the first large winning opening sensor 2402 is attached in a state in which the detection hole is projected forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Furthermore, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide. In addition, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to a portion on the left side of the first guide hole 2411 b and a portion on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411 d on the rear surface of the unit base 2411.

  The front cover 2412 is formed in the shape of a box opened rearward, and is formed in a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage of the game balls B on the front of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf 2412a extending from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left and a left end from the left end of the first shelf 2412a in front view. It extends shorter than the first shelf 2412 a so as to be slightly longer than the diameter of B and lower from the lower position than the left end of the first shelf 2412 a to the left, and between the first shelf 2412 a And the second shelf 2412 b forming the second starting opening 2004 and the second shelf so as to be lower left from a position lower than the diameter of the gaming ball B on the left than the left end of the second shelf 2412 b A third shelf 2412c, which extends shorter than the portion 2412b, and a distance 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B from the left end of the third shelf 2412c to the left, and a third shelf 2412c. Lower from lower position to lower left It extends so that has a fourth ledge 2412d forming the first special winning opening 2005 between the third ledge 2412c, a.

  The right end of the first shelf 2412 a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 slightly longer than the diameter of the gaming ball B to the left. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

  Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the lower end of the first upright wall 2412e, and the first upright wall 2412e vertically extending downward from the right end of the first shelf 2412a, and vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf 2412a. A second upright wall 2412f extending to a height, a third upright wall 2412g vertically extending downward from the right end of the second shelf 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first upright wall 2412e, and a third shelf 2412c A fourth upright wall 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412, a fifth upright wall 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c, and a right end of the fourth shelf 2412d And a seventh upright wall 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf 2412d.

  The fifth vertical wall portion 2412i extends slightly downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to become lower leftward. , Further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth upright wall portion 2412 j extends slightly downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412 d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412 d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the gaming ball B so as to be lower rightward. The upper side further extends downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth upright wall 2412i and the sixth upright wall 2412j in the left-right direction is an interval longer than twice the diameter of the gaming ball B.

  Furthermore, the front cover 2412 includes a first lateral wall 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first vertical wall 2412e, the second vertical wall 2412f, and the third vertical wall 2412g, and a first vertical wall on the right side of the front cover 2412. From the position lower than the lower end of 2412e, the game ball B is inclined to the left from the lower position with the first horizontal wall portion 2412l at a flowable distance and then to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side And a second lateral wall portion 2412 m which is inclined to be higher. The first lateral wall portion 2412 l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guiding hole 2411 b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412 m is formed such that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second start port 2004 is the lowest.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends from near the lower part of each of the fifth vertical wall 2412i and the sixth vertical wall 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth vertical wall 2412i and the sixth vertical wall 2412j, in the direction approaching each other. An extending third lateral wall portion 2412 n and a partition portion 2412 o connecting the respective opposite ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412 n and extending upward are provided. The third lateral wall portion 2412 n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411 d in the unit base 2411.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and a space in which the game ball B can flow between the second shelf 2412 b and the third shelf 2412 c. Are provided. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The upper shelf portion 2412 p has a right end located immediately above the left end of the first shelf portion 2412 a and a left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412 d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412 p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

  The front cover 2412 is not shown in the figure, but is a front portion of the contact portion 2411 e of the unit base 2411 and is a triangular portion at a position where the two contact portions 2411 e of the unit base 2411 are laterally staggered. It has two abutments projecting backwards in shape. These contact parts are the game balls B rolling on the door part 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, and the contacting parts 2411e of the unit base 2411 It cooperates and distributes it in the shape of a large zigzag in the front-back direction.

  The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape opened forward. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second start opening door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first big winning opening door 2417, a first attachment solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 holds the second start opening sensor 2401, the first large winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out sensor 2403 in cooperation with the front cover 2412.

  The second start opening door 2414 extends horizontally from the lower end of a flat door 2414 a, an arm 2414 b extending downward from the door 2414 a, and a lower end of the arm 2414 b relative to the unit base 2411. And a connecting portion 2414d provided at a lower part of the arm 2414b away from the rotating shaft 2414c and connected to the tip of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415. .

  The door portion 2414a of the second start opening door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second start opening door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a, and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connection portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotation shaft 2414c in the arm portion 2414b.

  The second start opening door 2414 can close the second start opening 2004 by the door portion 2414 a. The second start opening door 2414 rotates (rotates) about the rotation shaft 2414 c by advancing and retracting the plunger of the start opening solenoid 2415 in the front-rear direction, whereby the door portion 2414 a moves in the front-rear direction. The start port 2004 can be opened and closed.

  The start port solenoid 2415 is mounted with the plunger projecting forward. In the start-up port solenoid 2415, in a non-energized state, the plunger projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts by being energized.

  The first large winning opening door 2417 has a flat plate-like door portion 2417a long in the left and right direction, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both lateral direction ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b, respectively. The rotary shaft 2417c coaxially extends from the lower end in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical link pin 2417d projecting rightward from the lower portion of the right arm 2417b.

  The door part 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The pair of arm portions 2417 b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417 a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417 a. The link pin 2417 d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417 b closer to the door portion 2417 a than the rotary shaft 2417 c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted in a slit 2419c extending in the vertical direction of a transmission member 2419 described later.

  The first big winning opening door 2417 can close the first big winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. As the first large winning opening door 2417 rotates (rotates) about the rotation shaft 2417c by moving the plunger of the first attachment solenoid 2418 back and forth, the door 2417a moves in the front-back direction, The first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

  The first attachment solenoid 2418 is mounted with the direction in which the plunger protrudes facing forward. When the first attachment solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger is retracted by energization.

  The transmission member 2419 penetrates in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the front end of the extension 2419b and a base 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attachment solenoid 2418, an extension 2419b extending forward from the base 2419a And a slit 2419c extending vertically. The link pin 2417 d of the first large winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419 c of the transmission member 2419.

  A plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted on the front of the first big winning opening decorative substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first big winning opening decoration substrate 2420 are full color LEDs. The first large winning opening decoration substrate 2420 can cause the first large winning opening 2005 to be lighted and decorated by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light.

  In the first attachment unit 2400, in the normal state, the start port solenoid 2415 and the first attachment solenoid 2418 are in the non-energized state (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 protrudes forward by the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second start port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. Protruding forward. In this state, the door 2414a of the second start opening door 2414 is located above the second start opening 2004, and the door 2414a can not receive the game ball B into the second start opening 2004. It has become. That is, the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2414 (the door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

  Also, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacher solenoid 2418 protrudes forward by the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door 2417a of the first large winning opening door 2417 is the second opening of the unit base 2411 It projects forward through 2411c. In this state, the door 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is located above the first big winning opening 2005, and the door 2417a can not accept the game ball B to the first big winning opening 2005. It is in a state of That is, the first large winning opening 2005 is closed by the first large winning opening door 2417 (the door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

  In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2412 a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf 2412 a, and the door 2414 a of the second start opening door 2414 After rolling the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, the left shelf 2412b is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game balls B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412 b fall onto the third shelf 2412 c or the door 2417 a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and are inclined to the left by their inclination. Roll towards. In addition, when the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412 b abuts on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412 p and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412 b and the third shelf 2412 c May enter the

  At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a closing the first big winning hole 2005 is against the contact portion of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, It will contact alternately and will roll to the left while zigzag in the front and back direction. The game ball B rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a rolls the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then is released from the left end of the gaming machine B to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

  In this first attacking unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right from the first shelf 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first upright wall 2412e and falls near the right end of the second lateral wall 2412m, and the second lateral wall Due to the inclination of the portion 2412 m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub out port 2011. In addition, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c, it passes between the third vertical wall 2412g and the fourth vertical wall 2412h to reach the second horizontal wall 2412m. It falls near the left end and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m to enter the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B entering the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and is then returned to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned into the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back induction unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. In the first attacker unit 2400, the gaming ball B distributed on the right side of the first shelf 2412a and the gaming ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c are all One sub-out port 2011 is formed, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

  In this normal state, when the starting opening solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger resists the biasing force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d on the upper side (door side 2414a side) of the rotation axis 2414c of the arm 2414b of the second start opening door 2414 is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second start opening door 2414 pivots in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward, with the rotation shaft 2414c as the center. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper side of the second start port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004. It becomes. That is, the second start port 2004 is in the open state.

  When the game ball B is received by the second start port 2004 when the second start port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second upright wall portion 2412 f and the third upright wall portion 2412 g to the second start aperture sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls onto the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion of the first lateral wall portion 2412l between the second upright wall portion 2412f and the third upright wall portion 2412g is inclined to be lower rearward, and the game ball B is rolled backward by the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411 b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The gaming ball B discharged rearward from the rear end of the first guiding hole 2411 b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Exhausted.

  On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, When the first attachment solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the biasing force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 is retracted, the link pin 2417d of the first large winning opening door 2417 inserted in the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

  As a result, the first special winning opening door 2417 is pivoted so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward about the rotation shaft 2417c, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward relative to the front surface of the unit base 2411 It will move. When the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 moves to the rear of the front of the unit base 2411, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the game to the first big winning opening 2005 The ball B can be received (see FIG. 124). That is, the first large winning opening 2005 is in the open state.

  When the game ball B is received by the first large winning opening 2005 when the first large winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the fifth standing wall passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j. After being detected by one of the two first big winning opening sensors 2402 passing between the section 2412i and the partition section 2412o or between the sixth standing wall section 2412j and the partition section 2412o, It falls onto the three lateral wall portions 2412 n. The third lateral wall portion 2412 n is inclined so as to be lower from the upper surface to the rear, and the gaming ball B dropped onto the third lateral wall portion 2412 n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 is It is discharged rearward through the second guiding hole 2411 d. The gaming ball B discharged rearward from the second guiding hole 2411 d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. .

  Thus, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the vicinity of the front end of the door 2417a closing the first winning opening 2005 in the first winning opening door 2417 opening and closing the first winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed by rotating the door 2417a around the rotation shaft 2417c which extends to the left and right at the same position in the front and rear direction. The depth in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2400) can be made as short as possible. This effect is the same for the second start port 2004 opened and closed by the second start port door 2414. As a result, the space behind the first attachment unit 2400 can be made relatively wide.

  Further, in the first attacker unit 2400, the gaming ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005 and the like is divided into two by the dividing portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first big winning opening sensor 2402 and unit base 2411 The game ball B can be prevented from being stuck between the first large winning opening 2005 and the first large winning opening sensor 2402, and many gaming balls can be produced in a short time. B can be accepted.

5-8 e. Center feature]
Next, the center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 126 and 127 and the like. FIG. 126 (a) is a front perspective view of the center part of the front unit, and FIG. 126 (b) is a rear perspective view of the center part of the front unit. FIG. 127 is a front view of a center character. The center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting opening unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center character 2500 is formed in a transparent frame, and can visually recognize from the front the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000. .

  The frame-shaped center character 2500 has a portion projecting forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is in the frame. It can not be invaded.

  The center character 2500 has a frame-like peripheral wall 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate projecting from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2501 and contacting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. A flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 are provided. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 into which the center part 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center character 2500 when assembled in the gaming machine 5.

  The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1⁄4 to 1⁄5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange 2502 and the support 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

  A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude in the peripheral wall portion 2501, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support 2503 has an end side protruding from the peripheral wall 2501 formed in a shape conforming to the front shape of the peripheral wall 2501 or in a linear shape, so that the support 2503 is not noticeable. The support 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall 2501 in a range from the thickness of the support 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player can achieve an effect as reinforcement. It is difficult to see from the

  More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center character 2500 are provided. For example, in the support 2503 provided above the warp inlet 2511 to be described later and at the part where the peripheral wall 2501 is most protruded leftward, the shape of the peripheral wall 2501 at the part is the middle of the part extending vertically Is shaped like a bulging to the left. The tip end side of the support portion 2503 is formed along the peripheral wall 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall 2501 bulging left, and the portion on the peripheral wall 2501 bulging out is: It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135). The support portion 2503 of this portion is assembled to the game board 5, and a portion extending linearly in the upper and lower portions on the tip side of the support portion 2503 is the back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided behind It is approximately along a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, the front end side of the support portion 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decorative body 3030, which makes the support portion 2503 difficult to distinguish, and the back front left decoration provided relatively backward. The decoration of the body 3030 can be highlighted.

  Further, among the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 on the lower side of the warp inlet 2511 extends rightward in a rectangular shape, while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends obliquely. The support portion 2503 of this portion is located in front of the third back front left decoration unit 3710 C in the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in a state assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 etc.) ). Since the tip sides of the support portion 2503 extend in the left and right direction extend in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decoration unit 3710 C, the shape of the shutter 3732 is partially And the support portion 2503 is difficult to determine (see FIG. 111).

  The center character 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter in the front area on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 in front view than the front side of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). 2511, a warp outlet 2512 capable of releasing game balls B entering the warp inlet 2511 and opening in a frame on the rear side of the front of the game panel 1100, and the game balls B discharged from the warp outlet 2512 It has a stage 2513 which can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the lateral direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from the outside of the center character 2500 by jumping the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

  The stage 2513 of the center character 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center character 2500 is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. In the state of being attached to 1110, a substantially central position in the lateral direction is formed in a wave shape (W-shape) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. In this stage 2513, a portion (center emission portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portions (side emission portions 2513b) on the left and right sides thereof are directed forward. It inclines so that it may become low, and can release game ball B in the game area 5a from those sites.

  When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (center release portion 2513 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is positioned directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the gaming ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with extremely high probability.

  Further, the center product 2500 is provided with a guide passage group 2520 which is provided at the upper right corner and is capable of circulating the game ball B. The right end (the end of the upper right corner of the center combination 2500) of the guide passage group 2520 is an inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (a stop of the front component 1000) when the center combination 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) in the vicinity of the portion 1006 and is driven to the right above the center character 2500, is formed so as to pass the guide passage group 2520 without fail.

  The guide passage group 2520 has a length in the vertical direction of about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove opened forward, and it is possible to visually recognize the gaming balls B flowing in the inside in a good state from the front.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outer side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center character 2500, and is along the peripheral wall 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 separated from the peripheral wall 2501 and the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522 extending therefrom. The inlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the inlet of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. Further, the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open obliquely toward the lower right along the arc of the upper portion of the right rail 1005.

  The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center character 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the gaming balls B in contact with the stopper 1006 are first The guide passage 2521 is formed to enter.

  The center character 2500 projects rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and includes a lower right guiding passage 2530 for guiding the gaming ball B from the upper side to the right and releasing the game ball B downward. In the lower right guiding passage 2530, the inlet is opened upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and the outlet is opened obliquely toward the lower left with a width corresponding to one game ball B.

  The right end of the lower right guiding passage 2530 is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 and is located between the first and second attacker units 2400 and 2600. Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are disposed.

  According to the center product 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 corresponds to the center product 2500 at the portion where the support 2503 is provided. Because it becomes the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall 2501 (within the frame of the center character 2500) can be relatively widened, and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 on the rear through the frame of the center character 2500 and the back unit 3000 decorations etc can be made more visible.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 projecting inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall 2501 where the flange 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B abuts on the outer side of the portion of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center part 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center part 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

  In addition, the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided over the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, so the back of the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like. In addition, the center character 2500 such as the support portion 2503 is transparent, and the back front decoration 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are as close as possible to the rear surface of the center land 2500. Are arranged, it is possible to suppress blurring of the decoration of the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 by the lens effect of the transparent center character 2500. From such a thing, according to the center product 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body or the like provided behind can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 and the like are made transparent, and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body capable of emitting light and decoration and the effect display device 1600, the light can be decorated by light from them and the appearance is good. can do. Describing in detail, as shown in FIG. 135 etc., the back front left rendering unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 etc. in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (cross hatched portion in FIG. 135) , The light emitted forward from the LED on the back front left decoration substrate 3714 in the back front left rendering unit 3700, light from the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted or diffused to create a brilliant luminous decoration It can be shown to the player. Note that a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the support portion 2503, and light from the rear can be diffused by the step or the like, which can make it look more refreshing.

  In addition, the support portion 2503 is provided so that the portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided is provided to the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). In the near part, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall 2501. As a result, the game area of the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

  In addition, the peripheral wall 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 and the support 2503 Is made substantially flush with the front face of the panel board 1110, so that it is possible for the player to make the support part 2503 less noticeable and to make the center character 2500 appear to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center part 2500, the inside of the center part 2500 is further compared to the case where the support part 2503 is provided on the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind can be made more visible. In other words, when it is desired to make the non-circulation area (the inner side of the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall 2501 (center frame) of the center character 2500 large, the support 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall 2501. You may Alternatively, it is preferable to set the support portion 2503 to an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear in the front view.

  The edge of the support portion 2503 may be shaped the same as the shape (shape of the decoration) of the front cover 3711 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 provided at the rear. Thereby, the support portion 2503 can be different from the decoration on the rear side, so that the support portion 2503 can be suppressed from lowering the decorativeness of the decoration on the rear side at the same time. Can be enhanced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decoration 3030 or the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the back, and those decorations are made by the lens effect. Although what showed that it was made to suppress becoming blurred was shown, it is not limited to this, and it is made to provide the support part 2503 near the front end of the surrounding wall part 2501 away from the back unit 3000 behind. Intentionally, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided behind may be made to look blurry.

  In the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has the opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center character 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. It is also possible that the rear wall portion 2501 is not inserted into the opening 1112 and there is no part on the rear side, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 not having the opening 1112 . When the center character 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 not having the opening 1112, the support 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center character 2500 is not provided with the flange 2502. You may do so.

[5-8 f. Second Attack Unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 and 129 and the like. FIG. 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the second attachment unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and FIG. 128 (b) is the second attachment unit in the front unit, the side right middle unit, and It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a section of the passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the unit in the side right middle.

  The second attack unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center character 2500, between the lower right guiding passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a. It is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with a second large winning opening 2006 openable toward the left (see FIG. 129).

  The second attack unit 2600 is a second large winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an incorrect time acting in the vicinity of the second large winning opening 2006. And 2602. In addition, the second attack unit 2600 moves the second large winning opening door 2611 for closing the second large winning opening 2006 so as to be able to open and close, and the second large winning opening door 2611 to move the second large winning opening 2006. A second attachment solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for moving the second large winning opening door 2611 by transmitting and receiving the plunger of the second attachment solenoid 2612 and the second large winning opening 2006 And a guiding passage 2613 for guiding the received gaming ball B and releasing it backward.

  In the second attack unit 2600, the second large winning opening 2006 opens leftward at a position from the center in the left-right direction to the right, and the second large winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning opening door 2611 is provided.

  The second large winning opening door 2611 bulges leftward from the lower end of the semicircular shape bulging downward, the right side extending linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and the upper end of the right side The left side of the lower side is in contact with the left side of the arc, and is formed in a so-called blade shape. The second large winning opening door 2611 is a cylindrical rotary shaft 2611 a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from a position farther than the rotary shaft And a pin (not shown). The second large winning opening door 2611 has a lower rotation shaft rotatably mounted so that the upper end moves to the left.

  Although the second attachment solenoid 2612 is not shown in detail, the second attachment solenoid 2612 is attached with the plunger projecting downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attachment solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second large winning opening door 2611 can slide And a slit to be inserted, and is slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  The second attacking unit 2600 is positioned on the right side of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right side thereof substantially contacts the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 when assembled on the game board 5. A space in which the gaming ball B can circulate is formed between the right side and the right side in 2501. Further, in the second attachment unit 2600 assembled in the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward with respect to the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100.

  In the second attachment unit 2600, in the normal state, the second attachment solenoid 2612 is in the non-energized state (OFF), and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the own weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second large winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second large winning opening 2006 is closed by the second large winning opening door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B can not be received with respect to the second large winning opening 2006.

  In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, When the second attacher solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward with the plunger, and the link pin of the second large winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member pulls upward. By sliding in the slit, the second large winning opening door 2611 is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611 a.

  Thus, the upper end of the second large winning opening door 2611 moves leftward, and the second large winning opening 2006 is opened leftward, and the right end side of the second large winning opening door 2611 is lowered. It will be in the inclined state. That is, the second big winning opening 2006 is in the open state. In this state, when the game ball B flowing down contacts the second large winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination, and is accepted by the second large winning opening 2006. The game balls B received in the second large winning opening 2006 are detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2601 and then guided by the guiding passage 2613 and discharged rearward. The gaming ball B discharged rearward from the guiding passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8 g. Side Right Middle Unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 and 129 and the like. The side right middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the second attachment unit 2600 in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 has one general winning hole 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012.

  In the side right middle unit 2700, the right and left direction is the width of one game ball B upward and the general winning opening 2001 is always open, and adjacent to the right of the general winning opening 2001, the left and right direction is gaming The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward at a width of two balls B.

  Also, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the gaming ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 backward, with the first guiding passage 2701 guiding the gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward. And a second induction passage 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape which is bent to the right and then further bent backward after extending rearward from the general winning hole 2001. The second guiding passage 2702 bends rearward after extending from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guiding passage 2701. The outlet of the first induction passage 2701 and the outlet of the second induction passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

  When the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first induction passage 2701 and the second induction passage 2702 project rearward of the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

  In the side right middle unit 2700, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600 when assembled on the game board 5. Between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center character 2500, a space in which the game balls B can flow is formed. In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward slightly to the left of the second large winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 corresponds to the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward substantially throughout the entire space (see FIG. 130 and the like).

  The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first induction passage 2701 and is provided behind the back. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back induction unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery opening 3068 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the gaming ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second induction passage 2702 and is provided behind it. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back induction unit 3050 at 3000. The gaming ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub out sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8 h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is disposed between the guide passage group 2520 of the center character 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. It is done. The gate member 2800 is a gate unit 2003 in which a lottery of a normal lottery result is performed to open and close the second starting opening 2004 by passage of the game ball B, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate unit 2003. And 2801. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate unit 2003.

  The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 which protrudes obliquely from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface toward the lower left. The guiding piece 2802 is for guiding the gaming ball B which has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 in the assembled state to the game board 5.

  The gate member 2800 is located approximately at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5 The ball B forms a clearance through which it can flow. The gate member 2800 is positioned slightly leftward from immediately below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center character 2500, and also rightwardly from directly above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8 i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game balls B in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 115 and FIG. FIG. 130 is an explanatory view in which the right portion in the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. When assembled on the game board 5, a center character 2500 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center character 2500. In addition, on the left side of the center character 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W which is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the center character 2500 mainly enter the game ball B struck on the left side of the center character 2500 to a site on the right side of the center of the windmill W It adjusts so that it may approach to the site | part on the left side rather than the center of the windmill W at the same time while being adjusted. As a result, the game balls B can be made to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center character 2500 with a certain probability by being driven to flow down the left side of the center character 2500.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the guide passage group 2520 of the center character 2500 and the gate member 2800 is more than the gaming ball B which has flowed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game balls B distributed in the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 are adjusted so as to pass through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted such that the game ball B flows on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted such that the game ball B flows on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is struck from the left along the periphery of the game area 5a at the top. When the game ball B is hit to circulate the left side of the center character 2500 into the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the left side of the center character 2500. N is induced to enter either the warp inlet 2511 of the center work 2500 or the site on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the site to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than them. Induced to enter the

  The gaming ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility of being accepted by the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. After being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 is subjected to the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063 and the fourth delivery port of the back induction unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to any of 3064 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a bonus is given that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The gaming ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting opening 2002. Then, the gaming balls B that have not been accepted by the general winning opening 2001 are discharged from the out opening 2010 out of the gaming area 5a.

  The gaming ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is laterally centered by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center work 2500 (first start port 2002) It can be guided to the side and accepted by the first starting port 2002. In addition, the gaming ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through between the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, and the side unit 2200 There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general winning a prize mouth 2001 of.

  The game ball B that has entered (received) the warp inlet 2511 of the center character 2500 is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513. The game balls B supplied to the stage 2513 roll on the stage 2513 and move back and forth, and are discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central central release portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, so the first probability is high with a high probability. Acceptable at the starting port 2002. When the gaming balls B are released from the side release portions 2513b on the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a, they are received by the first starting opening 2002 with a certain degree of probability.

  The game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and is then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back induction unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first start opening sensor After being detected by the sensor 3052, the sheet is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, and a benefit such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls B is provided. The game balls B that have been released from the stage 2513 and not accepted by the first starting opening 2002 are discharged from the out opening 2010 out of the game area 5a.

  It should be noted that the game ball B distributed on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 or is accepted by the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit to the left of the center character 2500 has a probability that the game ball B hit to the right of the center character 2500 is accepted by the second start port 2004. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are not in the open state, it is possible to promote the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center character 2500 ("left hit").

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is entered with a strength such that the game ball B enters above the portion which decreases from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center character 2500 to the right. When the game ball B is hit, the gaming ball B circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  Specifically speaking, the game ball B is driven with strength to abut against the stopper portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 which constitutes a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called, right And the gaming ball B in contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the position directly above the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion by a plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. In 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is induced so that the probability becomes lower in the order, and flows downward to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven to the right of the upper part of the center product 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 It is discharged downward from the The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guiding passage 2522 is guided such that the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than those of the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 with substantially the same probability. It flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  The game ball B passing the right side of the gate member 2800 is received by the second sub-out port 2012. After the gaming ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back induction unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, the second sub-out port sensor After being detected by 3054, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. In addition, the gaming ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released to the side right middle unit 2700 side. By the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the result of the ordinary lottery that the second starting opening 2004 opens and closes is performed.

  The game ball B passing the left side of the gate unit 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability that the side right middle unit 2700 has a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the left side of the rear right side, and sometimes received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, or rarely received in the second sub-out port 2012. After being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back induction unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a benefit is awarded that a predetermined number of gaming balls B are paid out.

  The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 and the second winning opening 2006 in the second attack unit 2600 Flow down the left side of the

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the "small hit" is drawn as the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result, the second large winning combination Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the gaming ball B which has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with high probability in the second big winning opening 2006.

  The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2006 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2601 and, after being guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 which is out of the game area 5a, in the back unit 3000 It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back induction unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. As a result of the detection of the game ball B by the second big winning opening sensor 2601, a benefit is awarded that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

  The gaming ball B which has flown down the left of the second large winning opening 2006 without being accepted by the second large winning opening 2006 enters the lower right guiding passage 2530 of the center character 2500 and the exit of the lower right guiding passage 2530 Is discharged to the side of the first attacker unit 2400.

  The game balls B discharged downward (obliquely lower left) from the lower right guiding passage 2530 of the center character 2500 flow down onto the first shelf 2412 a of the first attacker unit 2400. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the lower right guiding passage 2530 and the first attachment unit 2400, the game ball B is directly connected to the first attachment unit 2400 from the lower right guiding passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right of the first upright wall portion 2412e.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412 a of the first attachment unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door 2414 a of the second start opening door 2414 and the second shelf 2412 b After rolling, it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game balls B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412 b fall onto the third shelf 2412 c or the door 2417 a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and their inclinations As a result, after rolling to the left and rolling the fourth shelf 2412d from the door 2417a, it is discharged to the left from the fourth shelf 2412d so as to be outside the first attacker unit 2400.

  It should be noted that depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guiding passage 2530 of the center product 2500, the upper shelf 2412p may not flow down to the first shelf 2412a by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N. It may flow down. The gaming ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination and is discharged from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p to the left, and then to the obstacle nail N implanted on the left. After it abuts and turns downward and flows down near the left end of the upper surface of the door 2417a in the first big winning opening door 2417, it rolls the door 2417a and the fourth shelf 2412d to the left to It is discharged out of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the gaming ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing at which the gaming ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing at which the first large winning opening 2005 is opened, It may be accepted by the winning opening 2005.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guiding passage 2530 of the center character 2500, the first shelf 2412a bounces to the right due to contact with the right end of the obstacle nail N or the upper shelf 2412p. By flowing upward, the first shelf 2412a may be rolled rightward against the inclination thereof, and may be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B discharged to the right from the right end of the first shelf 2412 a flows between the first upright wall 2412 e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and flows down near the right end of the second lateral wall 2412 m. Because of the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and is received by the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and is not returned to the inside of the game area 5 a. The fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 And is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 from the back induction unit 3050.

  When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center character 2500, if the “normal hit” is randomly drawn as a result of the passage of the game ball B at the gate section 2003, the second start Since the mouth door 2414 is movable and the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf 2412 a to the left is received by the second start opening 2004 there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second start port 2004, after being detected by the second start port sensor 2401, the game ball B is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 which is outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a benefit such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

  In addition, when the game ball B is released leftward from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery As a result, when the "big hit" is drawn, the first large winning opening door 2417 is movable and the first large winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, so it is released leftward from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted by the first big winning opening 2005 with high probability. The game ball B accepted by the first large winning opening 2005 is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. As a result of the detection of the game ball B by the first big winning opening sensor 2402, a benefit is awarded that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412b flow downward by coming into contact with the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2412 c and the shelf 2412 c. The game ball B which has entered the gap between the second shelf 2412 b and the third shelf 2412 c passes between the third vertical wall 2412 g and the fourth vertical wall 2412 h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2412 m. It falls and is rolled to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m to be received in the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center character 2500 to the first attachment unit 2400 side is received by any of the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011 If not, it is discharged to the lower part of the lower end of the game area 5a and the like, the lower part behind the game panel 1100 which is outside the game area 5a.

  From such a thing, in order to open and close the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, let the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 receive the game ball B, and "small hit" And it is necessary to make the lottery of the first special lottery result such as “big hit” or the second special lottery result. While the first starting opening 2002 is always open, it is necessary for the second starting opening 2004 to cause the gate section 2003 to pass the game ball B and to draw a "normal hit" as a normal drawing result. Because of this, the opportunity for the game ball B to be received by the second starting opening 2004 is lower than that of the first starting opening 2002.

  Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball B is hit so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center role 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting opening 2002 for the player. The operation can be performed, and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to entertain the original game by the pachinko machine 1 and the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 Expectations for the acceptance of

  Then, when "small hit" or "big hit" is drawn as a result of the first special drawing by the game ball B being accepted to the first starting opening 2002, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 In order for the game ball B to be accepted in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 in order to open and close, the hitting operation of the gaming ball B is changed to “right strike”, and the first large winning opening It is possible to increase the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B to the 2005 or the second winning opening 2006.

  At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center product 2500, and it is easy to pass the gate portion 2003 by the guide passage to be circulated. , And the second sub-out port 2012 can be easily received, so that the game ball B can adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates in the desired guide passage. It is possible to entertain the B's driving operation.

  In addition, by making the gate portion 2003 pass the game ball B by performing "right strike", there is a possibility that the "normal hit" in which the second start port 2004 is opened may be drawn, The game ball B is allowed to be accepted in the second start port 2004, and there is a possibility that "small hits" and "big hits" may be drawn, so it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. Can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The entire configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower portion of the front end in the back box 3010 and the flat back left front decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 provided respectively near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The back induction unit 3050, the back-rear rendering unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back induction unit 3050 at the lower part in the back box 3010 are provided separately left and right A back down left rendering unit 3200 and a back down right rendering unit 3250, and a back down inside rendering unit 3300 provided behind the back down left rendering unit 3200 and the back down right rendering unit 3250 in the back box 3010; Have.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back front left decoration 3030 in the back box 3010 and the back up rendering unit 3400 provided in front of the back back rendering unit 3100 in the upper part in the back box 3010 The back rear left rendering unit 3500, the back rear right rendering unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, the back front left decoration 3030 in the back box 3010, and the back left A back front left rendering unit 3700 provided between the rendering unit 3500 and a back front right rendering unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right rendering unit 3600 in the back box 3010 And 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, the back front left decoration 3030, the back front right decoration 3040, and various effect units are attached, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive substrate unit 1700 are attached to the back side. The back box 3010 is transparently formed of a synthetic resin.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixed piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted A notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 is provided near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

  The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted to the left and right on the left side in a back view of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for attaching a decorative body, a rendering unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  In addition, the back box 3010 has a band plate-like reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate mounted along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010 a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Subsequently, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of a pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged with the door frame being transparent. The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be separated left and right.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends up and down at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the decoration seal | sticker 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front left decoration 3030 is formed to be opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

  The back right front decoration 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the decoration seal 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front right decoration 3040 is formed to be opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  When the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are assembled on the game board 5, the outer peripheral edge that is the outside extends flat in a flat shape so that the front outer view is positioned outside the game area 5a. (See FIG. 111 and FIG. 135 etc.). Furthermore, when the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the outer peripheral edge to be the outer side is a flat plate shape so as to be located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. It is extended to

  More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, in front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 and the half from the bottom of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is provided. It is extended to the position of In other words, the front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in a front view. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outside the door window 101 a of the door frame 3.

  Thereby, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 can be covered with the back front left decoration 3030 (shaded portion in FIG. 135), and the back rear left from the player side The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made less visible. Also, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decoration 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135) Since it is extended to the back front left decoration body 3030 and the door frame 3, it is possible to make the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, functional components such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is good. can do.

  Further, in the back front left decoration 3030, it is extended to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 Although a part (upper half) will be seen from the front, by assembling the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the back and rear lifting motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large, pachinko The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the front upper left corner of the front component 1000, the function display unit In place of 1400, the back rear left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 (functional parts) provided behind can be hidden by the back front left decoration 3030.

  On the other hand, in the front right back decoration 3040, it extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right lifting drive motor 3554 in the back rear right rendering unit 3600 in front view, transparent front Also through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3554 is not visible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved by making the functional parts such as the drive motor and drive solenoid provided behind the back right front decoration 3040 invisible from the player side. The same effect as that of the back left front decoration 3030 can be exhibited.

  As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of functional components such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the back is covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts visible and difficult from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

  Further, as described above, since the front of the functional components provided behind can be covered by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible from the player side. That is, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the clear front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce clear visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a, and can give the player a sense of openness, as well as the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made large (wide) for the player. At this time, portions outside the game area 5a in the decorative seal 3032 of the front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the rear right front decorative body 3040 to which the predetermined decoration is applied are the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since they can be viewed from the front through them, they can also decorate the outside of the game area 5a, and can make the game area 5a appear larger than it actually is, a game that can strongly attract the player's attention The board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be used.

  Further, as described above, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, so the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit Light from 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted to the front (player side) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

  It should be noted that functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the back from the player side by the portions of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending outward beyond the game area 5a. All functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in a front view because they can be made invisible. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, if it is attempted to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Because there is a risk that problems that must be done will occur, as in the present embodiment, some of the functional components are out of the game area 5a with a balance that allows the game area 5a to be taken large relative to the size of the game board 5 It is desirable to provide.

  Further, it is desirable that the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 be a decoration associated with the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in a front view. Thus, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can show 5a larger than the actual size and can attract the player's attention strongly.

[5-9c. Back induction unit]
Next, back induction unit 3050 in back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back induction unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower portion of the front end in the back box 3010, and is shaped such that both left and right extending ends are bent upward. The back induction unit 3050 is substantially transparent.

  The back induction unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3052 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the first starting opening 2002. An out-port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out-port 2010, a second sub-out sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center character 2500 And a magnetic sensor 3055 provided at the rear of the sensor for detecting an incorrect magnetism.

  In addition, the back induction unit 3050 is received by the first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and by the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. The second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, the third delivery port 3063 to which the gaming ball B received by the general winning a prize port 2001 on the inner side of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and the left side of the side unit 2200 The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the gaming ball B accepted in the winning opening 2001 is delivered, and the gaming ball B accepted to the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attachment unit 2400 are delivered first The game ball B accepted in the five delivery openings 3065 and the first large winning opening 2005 of the first attachment unit 2400 is delivered Accepted at the sixth delivery opening 3066, the seventh delivery opening 3067 to which the game ball B received at the second large winning opening 2006 of the second attack unit 2600 is delivered, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 An eighth delivery port 3068 to which the game ball B is delivered and a ninth delivery port 3069 to which the game ball B received to the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 is delivered.

  Furthermore, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back induction unit 3050 guides the gaming ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and discharges the game ball B downward, and the second receiving path. The second discharge path for discharging the game ball B transferred to the transfer port 3061 and the game ball B transferred to the third delivery port 3602 after being merged and delivered to the fourth transfer port 3063 And the third discharge path for guiding the gaming ball B downward and discharging it obliquely to the lower right, and the position where the gaming ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is lower than the sixth delivery port 3066 The vehicle is guided downward to the left, and then guided leftward to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066, and then the fourth discharge path discharged diagonally to the lower left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 are in communication with the fourth discharge path.

  The gaming ball B received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery opening 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharging path. Be done. The game ball B received by the right general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second delivery opening 3062 and received by the middle general winning opening 2001 is transferred to the third delivery opening 3063 and played After being merged with the ball B in the second discharge path, the ball B is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole 2001. The gaming ball B accepted by the left general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery opening 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

  Accepted by the second start port 2004 or the first sub out port 2011 of the first attacher unit 2400 and delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 and accepted by the game ball B and the first large winning opening 2005 of the first attacher unit 2400 The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B accepted to the seventh delivery port 3067 received by the second large winning opening 2006 of the second attack unit 2600 are the fourth It is discharged through the discharge channel.

  The gaming ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is on the upstream side of the portion communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 merges with the fourth discharge path after being detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and It is discharged through 4 discharge channels.

  The back induction unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006. In order to detect the game ball B received by the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5 a among the game balls B (also referred to as the game ball B to which the benefit was not given). belongs to.

  The out ball detection member 3080 is inserted from the back into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the cylinder portion 3081 and the cylinder portion 3081 extend in the longitudinal direction so that the game ball B can flow. The gaming ball B is continuous with a partition portion 3082 that divides the inside left and right, a flange portion 3083 that protrudes in a flat plate shape in the horizontal direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 And a rear cover 3084 which can be guided and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out ball detection member 3080 is provided with an out port sensor 3053 between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

  The cylindrical portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and the width in the left-right direction is wide enough for two game balls B to line up (width where three game balls B do not line up) and the lower inner surface is It inclines to become lower toward the rear side. The partitioning portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and is partitioned into sizes that allow one game ball B to pass through on the left and right sides. The front end side of the partition portion 3082 is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball B.

  In the out ball detection member 3080, two out port sensors 3053 are provided side by side in the left and right direction. The left out-port sensor 3053 detects the game ball B that has flowed through the left side of the partition section 3082 in the cylindrical section 3081, and the right-side out port sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition section 3082 in the cylindrical section 3081. The game ball B which has been distributed is detected. The out port sensor 3053 is a noncontact electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The two out-port sensors 3053 are provided such that the detection direction of the gaming ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the gaming ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081. Thus, the distribution direction of the gaming ball B circulating in the cylinder portion 3081 does not change even in the part of the out port sensor 3053. Therefore, the gaming ball B can be detected smoothly to the out port sensor 3053. Can be promptly discharged to prevent the stagnation at the front side of the out port sensor 3053.

  The cylinder portion 3081 is inserted into the out concave portion 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 in a state where the out ball detection member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

  With the out ball detection member 3080 assembled in the game board 5, the upper end of the front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes more forward than the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200.

  After falling out to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, the out ball detection member 3080 is guided rearward by the out guiding portion 1003 and received in the out port 2010 The detected game ball B is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053 through the inside of the cylinder portion 3081, and is guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without bringing the game ball B into contact with the substrate holder 1200.

  According to the out ball detection member 3080 of this embodiment, since the two out port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right are partitioned by the dividing portion 3082, the gaming ball B which has flowed down the left side of the center prize 2500 is The game ball B that has flowed down on the right side of the center character 2500 can be guided to the out-port sensor 3053 on the right side as well as can be guided to the out-port sensor 3053 on the left side. Therefore, in each of the left and right out-port sensors 3053, it is determined whether the player is in the "left-handed" or the "right-handed" tendency by the number of gaming balls B detected per time. And, based on the determination, it is possible to promote the most suitable typing operation for the game situation and enjoy the intended game.

  In addition, in the out ball detection member 3080, since the game ball B is easy to get over by shortening the forward protrusion of the partition portion 3082, when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, the partition The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the circulation amount of the game ball B is relatively small in the part 3082, and the game ball B can be discharged without any delay at the out port 2010.

  In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is protruded lower than the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second large winning opening 2006, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 is backflowed by the out ball detection member 3080 and the out port sensor 3053 It can be prevented from being detected, and only the "out ball" received by the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

  In the present embodiment, although the out ball detection member 3080 is provided in the back unit 3000, the present invention is not limited to this, and the out ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out concave portion 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out concave portion 1123. While being able to do, it is possible to retrofit to the existing game board 5.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the game area 5a is driven into the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006. The game ball B (“out ball”) which has not been accepted by any of them can be detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054. If the "out ball" is not detected despite the fact that the acceptance of the game ball B to the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent action has been made to a specific winning opening, It can be informed that fraudulent activity is being conducted.

  Also, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening Number of "winning balls" counted by detection of gaming ball B accepted in 2006, number of "out balls", general winning hole 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, first large The payout rate in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of “safe balls” paid out by the reception of the game ball B in the winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006. Although illustration is omitted, on the rear side of the game board 5, a display unit for displaying a "payout rate" is provided.

  In addition, in the game board 5, all the game balls B ("global") driven into the game area 5a are detected, or all the game spheres B ("global") discharged from the inside of the game area 5a Because the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, and the second sub-out sensor 3054 detect only the “out ball”, the “out ball”, the “winning ball” are detected. By comparing the numbers of “all balls” and “all balls”, it is possible to detect the occurrence of clogging in the game board 5.

[5-9 d. Back and forth production unit]
Next, the back-to-back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the back-back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear rendering unit disassembled and the rear viewing. FIG. 140 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back-rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back-rear effect unit.

  The rear-rear effect unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost side (the front surface of the rear wall) in the rear box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape that is open downward as viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-to-back effect unit 3100 includes a back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back-to-back movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

  The back movable movable decorative body 3110 is a translucent decorative body 3111 which extends in the left-right direction and has a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and is provided behind the decorative body 3111 and has a plurality of on the front surface. A back-to-back decorative substrate 3112 on which the LED is mounted, and a decorative body base 3113 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the back side of the back-to-back decorative substrate 3112 are provided. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back and forth decorative substrate 3112 are full color LEDs. The decorative body 3111 (the back movable movable decoration 3110) can be made to emit light by a plurality of LEDs of the back rear decoration substrate 3112.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided on the left side of the decorative body 3111 in the decorative body base 3113 and extends leftward and rightward from the lower end vicinity of the left slider 3114 and the left slider 3114 From the protrusion 3115, the locking protrusion 3116 protruding in a triangular shape from the vicinity of the upper end of the left slider 3114, the detection piece 3117 provided on the upper end of the left slider 3114, and the decoration 3111 in the decoration base 3113 And a right slider 3118 provided on the right side and extending vertically.

  The back movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U shape whose front view shape is opened downward, and extends vertically in a cylindrical shape on the left side of the unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the unit base 3121 The slide shaft 3122, which supports the left slider 3114 of the movable decorative body 3110 movably in the vertical direction, extends up and down parallel to the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122 and spirals on the outer periphery And a spiral shaft 3123 in which the groove is formed.

  In the back-to-back movable mechanism 3120, a spur gear transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 are used as rotation shafts. A motor drive 3126 attached to the back, a motor base 3127 mounting the back drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121 and an upper end rotatably mounting the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 to the unit base 3121 A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably mounted near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 to the unit base 3121 are provided.

  In addition, the back-to-back movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 and is able to abut from below with respect to the movable projection 3115 of the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110, and on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123 The transmission slider 3131 extends vertically and can be moved up and down, and the lower end side can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 biasing the transmission slider 3131 upward, and the transmission slider 3131 A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by lifting and lowering, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by rotation of the link member 3133 and that can contact back with the locking projection 3116 of the movable decorative body 3110 Is equipped.

  Furthermore, the back-to-back movable mechanism 3120 is a back-to-back upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3117 of the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110, and a back-to-back lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130 a of the slide guide 3130, The front left cover 3137 is attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and the back side of the back of the movable decorative body 3110 is covered on the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover it from the front. The connection between the attached front right cover 3138 and the front left cover 3137 attached to the lower front of the front left cover 3137, back drive motor 3126, back back upper detection sensor 3135, and back rear lower detection sensor 3136 and effect drive board 1720 Between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138. A back right rear relay board 3140 relaying the connection between the back after the decorative substrate 3112 and effect driving substrate 1720 has vignetting in the back after the movable decorative body 3110, and a.

  The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121 a which abuts against the lower surface of the left slider 3114 of the rear movable movable body 3110 and the lower surface of the right slider 3118 which has moved downward and absorbs an impact. The upper and lower ends of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

  The slide guide 3130 protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130 a detected by the back-rear lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided slidably in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and can not rotate around the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. The lower surface of the movable projection 3115 of the rear back movable decorative body 3110 can be in contact with the upper surface of the slide guide 3130. Further, the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131 a of the transmission slider 3131 can be in contact with the lower surface of the slide guide 3130.

  The transmission slider 3131 is vertically movably attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 is vertically movable only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a cylindrical shape protruding backward from the vicinity of the upper end of the lower projection 3131a which protrudes rightward on the lower end side, the upper projection 3131b which protrudes rightward on the upper end side, and the upper projection 3131b. And a protruding pin 3131c. The lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can be in contact with the upper surface of the lower projection 3131 a of the transmission slider 3131. Also, in the transmission slider 3131, the projection pin 3131 c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133 a of the link member 3133.

  The upper end side of the spring 3132 is attached to the unit base 3121 and the lower end side is attached to the upper projection 3131 b of the transmission slider 3131 to bias the transmission slider 3131 upward.

  The link member 3133 is formed in the shape of a front view in the triangle in which each vertex was R-chamfered. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction near one vertex. The link member 3133 has an elongated hole-shaped first slit 3133 a extending in the direction of the rotating shaft near the vertex on the left side from the rotating shaft, and a elongated hole shaped in the direction of the rotating shaft near the vertex above the rotating shaft. And a second slit 3133 b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is slidably attached in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137 between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 has a cylindrical shape protruding rearward, a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted in the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and a flat upper end face and in the lateral direction. The contact surface 3134b is extended so that the lower surface of the lock projection 3116 of the rear movable back decoration 3110 can be abutted, and is inclined to move leftward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b. And a guide surface 3134c against which the locking projection 3116 can abut.

  The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to slidably support the right slider 3118 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-rear effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal condition, as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141 (a)), the back-to-back effect unit 3100 is in the retracted position where the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 has moved upward, and the slide guide 3130 Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and is located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable projection 3115 of the left slider 3114 of the back movable back 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the back movable back decoration on the contact surface 3134 b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116 of 3110 abuts.

  In the normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 3132. The projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The biasing force of 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in the clockwise direction about the rotation axis, and the locking member 3134 is biased in the direction of sliding to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

  In this state, the downward movement of the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 is restricted by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if any of the slide guide 3130 and the locking member 3134 moves from the position for any reason (failure), the rest prevents the back movement of the movable decorative body 3110 from falling (dropping) by the rest. it can.

  In a normal state, the first slit 3113a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b in which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted is rotated. It is located to the right of the axis. Also, the back-rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3117 of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the back-rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

  In the normal state of the retracted position, the back-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the back-up effect unit 3400 and can not be viewed from the front (the player side).

  In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the back-rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is downward. Move to Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, since the locking projection 3116 of the rear back movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be moved downward from the retracted position Instead, only the slide guide 3130 is moved backward away from the movable projection 3115 of the movable decorative body 3110 from behind.

  Then, when the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130 a is detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is the lower protrusion 3131 a of the transmission slider 3131. Contact the upper end surface (see FIG. 141 (b)). When the slide guide 3130 is further moved downward while the back-back lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower projection 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132.

  As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 in which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is anticlockwise as its center of rotation. It will turn around. Then, when the link member 3133 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the second slit 3133 b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and via the transmission pin 3134 a inserted in the second slit 3133 b. The lock member 3134 moves to the left (see FIG. 141 (c)).

  When the lock member 3134 moves to the left from the back protrusion 3116 of the back of the movable decorative body 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is not detected with respect to the back-rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back-rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

  Then, the back movable backrest 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121 so that the falling back is stopped and the appearance position state is obtained (see FIG. 141 (c)). In the state of this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3114 of the back movable movable decoration 3110, and the back movable movable decoration 3110 does not abut.

  In the back-to-back effect unit 3100, the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 can be viewed from the front (the player side) in the state of the appearance position where the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 is dropped. In this state, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear decoration substrate 3112, it is possible to make the back light movable decoration 3110 (the decoration 3111) emit light and decoration, and the back rear movable decoration 3110 The luminous decoration can entertain the player.

  When the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is returned from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the back rotation drive motor 3126 reverses the spiral shaft 3123 (here, clockwise in plan view) Direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward by the biasing force of the spring 3132 together with the slide guide 3130. Then, as the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 pivots in the clockwise direction and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

  In addition, when the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131 a comes back and comes in contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3115 of the movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable projection 3115 upward. By pressing the back, the back movable movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward (see FIG. 141 (d)).

  Then, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to near the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116 abuts on the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the lock projection 3116 abuts on the guide surface 3134c from below and the lock projection 3116 presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes the lock member 3134 to move leftward. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides to the right against the biasing force of the spring 3132 which is to move to the right through the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

  When the lock projection 3116 is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 by the upward movement of the movable decorative body 3110 from the back, the upward pressing of the guide surface 3134c by the lock projection 3116 is eliminated. The lock member 3134 slides to the right by the biasing force of the spring 3132 to be in the lock position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134 b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking projection 3116 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back movement movable decorative body 3110 is moved downward by the lock member 3134. It can be regulated.

  At this time, the detection piece 3117 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the back rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this manner, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearance position to the state of the retracted position, which is a normal state.

  According to the back / rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extending left and right is dropped from the state of the retracted position which can not be visually recognized from the player side to the state of the appearance position which can be visually recognized. As a result, the player can have a strong impact on the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, since the lock is released by moving the lock member 3134 that locks (regulates) the movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position back to the left, the lock is released around the axis in the front-rear direction. As compared with the case where the lock is released by moving, the back movable decoration 3110 can be dropped without being moved upward when the lock is released.

5-9 e. Back down left production unit and back down right production unit]
Next, the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the back lower right rendering unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 142 to 145 and the like. FIG. 142 (a) is a perspective view of the lower back left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 (b) is the back lower left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is the lower back left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the back It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 145 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back lower left rendering unit and the back lower right rendering unit from the front.

  The back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the back lower right rendering unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear rendering unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back down left rendering unit 3200 and the back down right rendering unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the back down bottom decoration unit 3320 of the back down bottom rendering unit 3300 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and from the front It is made visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

  First, the back lower left rendering unit 3200 will be described. The back bottom left rendering unit 3200 is provided behind the back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 having a light transmitting property and having a shaft shaft 3201 a protruding backward, and the back bottom left rotating decoration body 3201, and has a light transmitting property. A back-down left decoration substrate 3203 provided on the back of the back-down left decoration body 3202 and the back-down left decoration body 3202 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, a back of the back-down left decoration substrate 3203 And a back-and-left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached and a back-and-bottom left decorative body 3202 is attached, and a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the back-rear rendering unit 3100 And.

  In addition, the back lower left rendering unit 3200 is attached to the back lower left drive motor 3205 mounted on the front of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation axis protrudes rearward, and to the rotation axis of the back lower left drive motor 3205 The first transmission gear 3207 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the drive gear 3206 and the drive gear 3206 and rotatably mounted to the unit base 3204 and the first transmission gear 3207 The spur gear second transmission gear 3208 rotatably mounted on the unit base 3204 and the second transmission gear 3208 are engaged with the second transmission gear 3208 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201 a of the back left rotating decorative body 3201 It is attached to the front of the unit base 3204 below the lower spur gear type third transmission gear 3209 and the back bottom left decoration 3202 Is provided with a cover 3210, a.

  The back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. An axial shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating through the back left left decorative body 3202, the back left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The lower back left decoration 3202 rotates so that the petal on the back side is positioned between the front petals, after the two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back back left rotating decoration 3201 are stacked back and forth It is formed in the shape as it is.

  In the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. A back lower left detection substrate 3203 is provided with a back lower left detection sensor 3203 a that detects a detection piece 3209 a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The lower back left detection sensor 3203 a protrudes through the unit base 3204 rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209 a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back lower left detection sensor 3203 a of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203. In the state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back lower left detection sensor 3203a, the back lower left rotary decorative body 3201 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 145). ).

  When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the lower back left drive motor 3205, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment is reversed via the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating ornament 3201 can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back bottom left rendering unit 3200 can emit light and decorate the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back bottom left decorative body 3202 by causing the plurality of LEDs of the back bottom left decorative substrate 3203 to emit light.

  Next, the back bottom right rendering unit 3250 will be described. The back bottom right rendering unit 3250 is provided behind the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 having a light transmitting property and having a shaft shaft 3251 a protruding backward, and the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251. A back-to-back right decoration substrate 3253 which is provided behind the back-to-back right decoration 3252 and the back-to-back right decoration 3252 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a back of the back-to-back right decoration substrate 3253 And a back-to-right rotation decoration 3251 is rotatably attached and a back-to-back right decoration 3252 is attached, and a unit base 3254 is attached to the lower end of the back side of the back-up rendering unit 3100 And.

  In addition, the back lower right rendering unit 3250 is attached to the back lower right drive motor 3255 mounted on the front of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation axis projects rearward, and to the rotation axis of the back lower right drive motor 3255 The first transmission gear 3257 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the drive gear 3256 and the drive gear 3256 and rotatably mounted on the unit base 3254 and the first transmission gear 3257 The spur gear second transmission gear 3258 rotatably mounted on the unit base 3254 and the second transmission gear 3258 are engaged with the second transmission gear 3258 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the back right rotation decorative body 3251 It is attached to the front of the unit base 3254 below the rear gear 3259 and the lower back decoration 3252. Is provided with a cover 3260, a.

  The back bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. An axial shaft 3251a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to a length passing through the back-right decorative body 3252, the back-right decorative substrate 3253 and the unit base 3254 . The lower back right decoration 3252 rotates so that the petal on the back side is located between the front petals, after the two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back back right rotating decoration 3251 are stacked back and forth It is formed in the shape as it is.

  In the back and bottom right decoration substrate 3253, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. A lower back right detection substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back detection sensor 3253 a for detecting a detection piece 3259 a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253 a protrudes rearward through the unit base 3254. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253. In the state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a, the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 145). ).

  When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the lower back right drive motor 3255, the lower back right rendering unit 3250 of the present embodiment is reversed via the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower-right rotation decorative body 3251 can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back bottom right rendering unit 3250 can emit light and decorate the back bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 and the back bottom right decoration 3252 by causing the plurality of LEDs of the back bottom right decorative substrate 3253 to emit light.

[5-9 f. Back and forth production unit]
Next, the back and bottom effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 146 to 153 and the like. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of a back unit in the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit in the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back-down middle lifting mechanism of the back-down middle effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is a disassembled back-back middle lifting mechanism of the back-back middle effect unit It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom decoration unit of the back effect rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is the back view disassembling the back bottom decoration unit of the rendering unit from the back It is the disassembled perspective view seen. FIG. 151 is an explanatory view showing raising and lowering of the back and forth middle decoration unit by the back and forth middle raising and lowering mechanism in the back and forth middle effect unit. FIG. 152 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front a configuration involved in rotation of the rotating decoration in the back of the decoration unit in the case of the unit in the back, in the effect unit for back; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor by a table. FIG. 153 is an explanatory front view showing the arrangement of LEDs of the back-to-back interior decoration unit in the back-to-back interior rendering unit.

  The back and bottom effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back bottom middle rendering unit 3300 is attached to the back side of the back bottom left rendering unit 3200 and the back bottom right rendering unit 3250. The back and bottom effect unit 3300 has a back and bottom inside decoration unit 3320 having a back and bottom inside rotation decoration 3310 that can rotate around an axis in the back and forth direction, and a back and bottom movement mechanism that raises and lowers the back and bottom inside decoration unit 3320 And 3350.

  The shape of the front view is formed in the shape of a regular hexagon in the back and in the inside of the back and in the inside of the rendering unit 3300. In this back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310, six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape of “1” to “6” on the entire surface are circular at an angle of 60 degrees clockwise around the center. It is arranged on the lap. The back-to-back rotating ornament 3310 has a light transmitting property. The back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 has a recess 3311 capable of accommodating the diffusion lens 3321 in the back-to-back inside decoration unit 3320, the back-to-back first decoration substrate 3322 and the front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 on the back surface. Have.

  As shown in FIG. 149 and FIG. 150 etc., the back-to-back decoration unit 3320 is provided on the back of the diffusion lens 3321 provided behind the back-to-back rotation decoration 3310 and the diffusion lens 3321, It is attached to the diffusion lens 3321 so as to sandwich the back side first decoration substrate 3322 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side and the back side bottom first decoration substrate 3322 from the back side The substrate fixing member 3323 having the shaft portion 3323a and the shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and is mounted on the back side of the rotating decorative body 3310 And a base 3324.

  In addition, the rear underside decoration unit 3320 projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotary base 3324 and has a region detection piece 3325 extending in a semicircular arc coaxial with the axial hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the region detection piece 3325 A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding above the rotary base 3324 and a spur gear-like rotary gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotary base 3324 are provided.

  Furthermore, the under-the-back decoration unit 3320 is provided at the rear of the rotary base 3324 and has a through opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, and the light transmission The second back decoration substrate 3329 provided on the back of the back back decoration 3328 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the back decoration second decoration substrate 3329 And a plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 capable of detecting the area detecting piece 3325 and a front side of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, and position specifying capable of detecting the position detecting piece 3326 And a sensor 3331.

  In addition, the lower back inner decoration unit 3320 is provided at the back of the lower inner back second decoration substrate 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is attached and the lower back inner decoration 3328 is attached. And a rotary drive motor 3333 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotary shaft projects forward from the rear surface of the movable base 3332; A spur gear-like drive gear 3334 meshing with the rotary gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 mounted on the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a rear side of the movable base 3332 are mounted on the rear side of the back lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 And a lifting slider 3336 slidably guided in the vertical direction by the slide rail 3360 of

  The front end sides of the diffusion lens 3321, the back bottom first decoration substrate 3322, and the substrate fixing member 3323 are located between the back bottom turning decorative body 3310 and the rotation base 3324 in the assembled state, and the back bottom middle It is in a state of being accommodated in the recess 3311 of the rotary decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with any of the rotary decorative body 3310 and the rotary base 3324 in the lower back. By appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the back side, it is possible to make the light decoration of the portion of the decoration (relief) of the numeral in the back side rotating decorative body 3310. The LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the back and bottom are full color LEDs. Further, the LEDs of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the back and bottom are full color LEDs.

  The area detection piece 3325 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotary base 3324 with a diameter larger than that of the rotary gear 3327. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the area detection piece 3325 is one of “3”, “4”, and “5” from among the numeral decorations of “2” and “3” in the back underside rotating decorative body 3310. Through the number decoration, it is formed in an arc shape in the range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis until the number decoration of "5" and "6".

  The plurality (six in this case) of position detection pieces 3326 project rearward from the rear surface of the rotary base 3324 on the circumference of a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. The respective position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) in the circumferential direction so that the respective position detection pieces 3326 are positioned at the center of the decoration of the numerals of the rotary decoration 3310 respectively. . In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a range of a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis, There is an interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degree−α degree (here, 36.66 degrees)) between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis (see FIG. 152A). .

  A plurality of (in this case, three) area specifying sensors 3330 are provided at intervals of an angle of θ degrees (60 degrees) centered on the rotation axis of the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of the first area specifying sensor 3330 a, the second area specifying sensor 3330 b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330 c in the clockwise order. In the present embodiment, in the state where the three area specifying sensors 3330 locate the decoration of "1" of the rotating decoration 3310 in the back bottom right above the rotation center, "3", "4", "5" It is provided at a position corresponding to the number decoration (see FIG. 152 (a)).

  The position detection sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the rotary decoration 3310 from the first area specifying sensor 3330a to the back bottom. ing.

  The movable base 3332 has a lift pin 3332a cylindrically protruding rearward from the lower part of the rear surface. The raising and lowering pins 3332a are slidably inserted into the second slits 3357b of the raising and lowering arms 3357 in the lower back middle raising and lowering mechanism 3350. The back down middle rotational drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotational position.

  The back-to-back decoration unit 3320 rotates the back-to-back rotation decoration 3310 through the rotation gear 3327 by rotating the drive gear 3334 by the back-to-back rotation drive motor 3333. Can. In addition, the back-to-back rotating ornament 3330 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-to-back first decoration substrate 3322 and the back-to-back second decoration substrate 3329 respectively, thereby causing the back-to-back rotating decoration 3310. And, the back decoration can be decorated with light emission.

  As shown in FIG. 147 and FIG. 148 etc., the unit base 3351 which is attached to the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the back lower right rendering unit 3250, and the unit base 3351 extend to the left and right. Is mounted on the front of the unit base 3351 with a back-to-back middle lift drive motor 3352 mounted so that the rotary shaft projects backward on the front of the A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 meshed with the gear-shaped drive gear 3353 and the drive gear 3353 and rotatably mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351 and meshed with the first transmission gear 3354 A spur gear second transmission gear 3355 rotatably mounted on the front of the unit base 3351 and a second transmission gear A spur gear gear 3356a meshing with 355, and a drive pin 3356b projecting forward cylindrically from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front face of the gear 3356a. And a lift cam gear 3356 rotatably mounted at an upper central portion.

  Further, the base end side extending in the left-right direction is rotatably attached to the front face of the unit base 3351 and the longitudinal direction in which the drive pin 3356b of the raising and lowering cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted To the first slit 3357a, the second slit 3357b extending in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and into which the elevating pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the decorative unit 3320 are slidably inserted And a lift arm 3357 having a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip, and a back-bottom middle lifting detection sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detection piece 3357c of the lift arm 3357; And a relay substrate 3358 attached to the front surface.

  Furthermore, the lower back middle lift mechanism 3350 is attached to the front of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lift cam gear 3356, and the lift arm 3357 from the front side. It is attached to the front of the front cover 3359 having a lift slit 3359a extending up and down through which the lift pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the decoration unit 3320 is inserted, and is raised and lowered in the back cover decoration unit 3320 A slide rail 3360 for guiding the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip of the lift arm 3357 move upward (front Clockwise to the eye) Arm 3357 is provided with a spring 3362 that is urged to rotate.

  The back bottom middle lifting drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower portion on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The lift arm 3357 is rotatably mounted at the same height as the center of the lift cam gear 3356 on the right side of the lift cam gear 3356 at the base end side. The tip end side of the lift arm 3357 extends further to the left than the lift cam gear 3356.

  The back bottom middle relay board 3358 is a back bottom middle first decoration board 3322, a back bottom middle second decoration board 3329, an area specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a back bottom turning driving motor 3333, a back bottom turning up and down driving motor At 3352, the connection between the back and forth middle rise and fall detection sensor 3358a and the effect drive board 1720 is relayed.

  The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359 a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The lift pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 are slidably inserted in the lift slits 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided to the right of the center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359 in the left-right direction. The back and bottom interior decoration unit 3320 can be supported to slide vertically in the vertical direction by the elevation slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360.

  When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the drive mechanism 3352, the elevating mechanism 3350 moves up and down the cam gear via the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the elevating cam gear 3356. The 3356 can be rotated. The lift arm 3357 can be rotated via the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted by the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356. The back decoration unit 3320 can be raised and lowered together with the rotation decoration body 3310 via the raising and lowering pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

  Next, the movement of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 and the back-to-back inside decoration unit 3320 in the back-to-back effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 is in the lowered position where the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 has moved to the lowermost position. In this normal state, the raising and lowering arm 3357 in the back lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 is positioned lower than the base end at the tip end side, and the detection piece 3357 c at the tip is raised and lowered in the back bottom middle relay substrate 3358 It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 151 (a)).

  In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the lift cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution of the lift cam gear 3356 and near the proximal end of the lift arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a. . More specifically, the normal passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3356. As a result, even if an urging force is applied to turn the lift arm 3357 in the clockwise direction by the spring 3362, the line of force of the urging force is in contact with the first slit 3357a. The lift cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3356 via the. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3356b of the lift cam gear 3356 does not revolve either, the lift arm 3357 does not rotate, and the decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the biasing force of the spring 3362 and the spring The biasing force 3362 does not act on the back and forth middle lifting drive motor 3352 via the lifting arm 3367 and the like.

  In the normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the lift cam gear 3356 may be in contact with the end of the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. Thus, when the lift arm 3367 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the biasing force of the spring 3362, the lift cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the lift arm 3367, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. The driving pin 3356b can not revolve and the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 can be locked to block the upward movement of the decoration unit 3320 in the back and bottom.

  In the back bottom middle effect unit 3300, in the normal state, among the plurality of number decorations in the back bottom middle rotary decoration 3310, the topmost number decoration is located inside the frame of the center character 2500. It is located and can be visually recognized well from the front (the player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Also, in the normal state, the lowermost number decoration is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the first decorative substrate 3322 in the back bottom and the second inside the back bottom By emitting the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329, in addition to the light emission decoration of the rotating decoration under the lower back, the first start port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be light emission decoration (see FIG. 120 etc.) ).

  In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the up and down elevating drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are interposed. As a result, the lift cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the lift cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. As the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip end, and the elevating arm As the distal end side of 3357 moves upward, it rotates in the clockwise direction centering on the proximal end side.

  As the lift arm 3357 rotates in the clockwise direction, the lift pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted in the second slit 3357b on the tip end side of the lift arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. The decoration unit 3320 is moved upward through the up and down pins 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356 b moves upward beyond the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356 b slides in the first slit 3357 a toward the proximal end. At this time, in the raising and lowering arm 3357, since the biasing force in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the upward movement of the back / rear middle decoration unit 3320 is assisted by the biasing force, and the back / under middle The load on the lift drive motor 3352 is reduced.

  When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches near the end of the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the drive gear 3353 is stopped to rotate at the same time as the drive motor 3352 stops driving. The revolution of pin 3356b is stopped. As a result, the movement of the back decoration unit 3320 by the lift arm 3357 is stopped, and the back decoration unit 3320 is in the state of the raised position at which the decoration unit 3320 is moved most upward.

  When the back bottom decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356 b with the first slit 3357 a extends through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force is applied to turn the lift arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction by the weight of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, the force's force line is in contact with the first slit 3357a. The lift cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 via the drive pin 3356b in contact. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3356b of the lift cam gear 3356 does not revolve either, the lift arm 3357 does not rotate, and the decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position during the back and bottom movement, and The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the back and forth middle lifting drive motor 3352 via the lifting arm 3367 and the like.

  In addition, in the state in which the decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the raising and lowering cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to abut the drive pin 3356b on the proximal end side of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lift arm 3367 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the weight of the lower back decoration unit 3320, the lift cam gear 3356 is watched by the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate around. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the lift arm 3367, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. The drive pin 3356b can not revolve, and the rotation of the lift arm 3357 can be locked to block the downward movement of the decoration unit 3320 in the back and bottom.

  In the state in which the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310 is positioned within the frame of the center character 2500 (further, the game ball rolling on the game area 5a B is positioned above the bounce preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center combination 2500 that prevents the B from bouncing inward from the outside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is forward (player From the side) you can see all the number decorations well (see Figure 185).

  When returning from the state where the back decoration unit 3320 has been moved to the raising position to the lowering position, the driving gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction to the above by the raising and lowering drive motor 3352 in the back holding position. Rotates in the counterclockwise direction to move the decoration unit 3320 downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip end of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the lifting sensor 3358a of the lower back of the relay substrate 3358, the rotation of the driving gear 3353 is stopped by the lifting motor 3352 of the lower back. , Lower down the decoration unit 3320 in the normal state down position (Furthermore, the game ball B rolling the game area 5a prevents the center ball (peripheral wall portion 2501) from bouncing back to the inside) The bounce preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front.

  The back-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the back-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the back-back middle decoration unit 3320 to make the back-back middle rotation decoration 3310 via the rotation gear 3327. Can be rotated about the longitudinal axis. By rotating the rotating decoration 3310 in the lower back, the six number decorations provided on the front are rotated like a roulette. The back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310 can be rotated by the back bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333 at any position of the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 such as the lowered position and the raised position.

  In the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, one of a plurality (here, six) of the number decorations in the back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 is positioned directly above the rotation center (stop position) doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the state in which the numeral decoration of “1” in the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned on the upper side, the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotating base 3324 While detecting with three area specifying sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, a plurality of (in this case, six) position detection pieces 3326 can be detected by the position specifying sensor 3331 Has not detected.

  Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the back-to-back middle rotary ornament 3310 will be described. In the state where the numeral decoration of “1” is at the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330 a, the second area specifying sensor 3330 b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330 c are the area detecting pieces 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detected, the numeral decoration of "1" centers on the stop position. And within the range of ± 30 degrees.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect it and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect it, the numeral decoration of "2" is an area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of "3" is an area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

  Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration of "4" is an area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located inside.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detected, the numeral decoration of "5" is an area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detected and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detected, the numeral decoration of "6" is an area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

  As described above, the combination of detection and non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330 of the first area specifying sensor 3330 a, the second area specifying sensor 3330 b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330 c makes any numeral decoration stop position It can be known (detected) whether it is located within the included stop area.

  And since the back down middle rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 rotates 30 degrees after detecting the area detection piece 3325, the back down middle rotation drive is performed. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numeral decoration of the rotating decoration 3310 in the back down at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, while the area of the stop position is specified by the three area specifying sensors 3330, recognition of the origin for stopping at the stop position has to be performed. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specification sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position specification sensor 3331. Thus, the load is reduced by suppressing the complication of control for stopping the rotation of the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back.

  More specifically, when it is desired to stop the back decoration middle rotation decoration 3310 at the stop position for the desired number decoration, the back rotation middle rotation decoration 3310 is rotated and the three area specifying sensors 3330 are desired. Since the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotational direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330 a when the combination satisfies the stop position, the position specifying sensor 3331 sets the center of the position detection piece 3326 It is detected. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

  In this state, when the back decoration middle rotation decoration 3310 is further rotated by α / 2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position specifying sensor 3331 Thus, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. An angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is set as an origin. Then, when it is rotated by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), the desired number is obtained by stopping the rotation of the back decoration 3033 by the rotation driving motor 3333 during the back rotation. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stopping position.

  In the above, the rotation stop of the rotating decorative member 3310 in the back down is described by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the rotation driving motor 3333 in the back down consisting of a stepping motor. For example, in the case where one rotation is set to 396 steps, when the back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by 13 steps in a combination where three area specifying sensors 3330 satisfy the desired stop position, the position detection piece 3326 Away from the position specifying sensor 3331, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. The desired number decoration is stopped by stopping the rotation of the back decoration middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the back rotation middle rotation drive motor 3333 when the position specifying sensor 3331 rotates by 20 steps with the angle at which the position detection sensor 3331 is not detected as the origin. The position can be accurately stopped.

  Next, the light emission decoration in the back and bottom effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 153, the back-to-back interior decoration unit 3300 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-to-back interior decoration unit 3310 to emit light and decorate the back-to-back interior decoration unit 3320. A decorative substrate 3322 and a second decorative substrate 3329 in the back and bottom are provided. The plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the back side are located behind the six numeral decorations in the back side rotating decorative body 3310, and each number decoration can be made to emit light independently.

  On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the second decoration substrate 3329 in the lower back is positioned behind the portion outside the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower back rotation decoration 3310, and is outside the lower back rotation decoration 3310. The rim can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, since the back-to-back inside effect unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the back-to-back inside-turn decorative body 3310 to a certain extent, as described above, based on the detection of the back-to-back inside rotation sensor 3310. Backside down, by turning on the plurality of LEDs of the first decoration substrate 3322 appropriately, it is rotated in a state in which only a specific number decoration is made to emit light or in a state in which each number decoration is made to emit light in different colors. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

  Further, when the back bottom inner decoration unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numeral decoration on the lower side of the back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310 is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, The first start port 2002 can be decorated to emit light by causing the LED of the corresponding portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 to emit light. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002. In addition, upon the game ball B winning in the first starting opening 2002, the LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 is turned on and off (or one of the plural light emission modes is determined to emit light). ) May be allowed.

  As described above, according to the back-and-back inside rendering unit 3300 of the present embodiment, this makes it possible to detect areas of lengths extending across the three stopping positions in the rotating back-to-back inside rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions. A three-area identification sensor 3330 for detecting the area detection piece 3325 and one position specification for detecting the position detection piece 3326 while providing the pieces 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position Since the sensor 3331 is provided, the three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotating direction and decrease after rotation of the rotating decoration body 3310 in the lower back. If all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not detect, even during the back-to-back rotation decoration 3310 is rotated to the next stop position. Not Rukoto, by a combination of area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325 can roughly grasp the current rotational position of the subplantar rotating decorative body 3310.

  Then, since the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the back-to-back rotating is detected by the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by the detection of the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-to-back inside-turn decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions as little as possible.

  In addition, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-to-back rotating ornament 3310, the back-to-back under-turn decorative member 3310 can be accurately stopped at any stop position. It is possible to prevent giving a sense of discomfort to the person, and it is possible to enjoy the effect (the movable effect) by the rotating decorative body 3310 in the back down and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to suppress the shift of the stop position even if the rotational speed of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 is increased. By rotating the lower and middle rotary decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower back and middle rotary decorative body 3310 is made greater than in the case where the lower back and middle lower rotary decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. You can be fast. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the rapidly rotating back and forth inside rotating ornament 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the rotation of the back downward rotating ornament 3310 can be performed. It can be entertained, and a drop in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the rotating decorative body 3310 is supposed to be rotated about an axis in the back and forth direction, and a plurality of numeral decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette rotating at the arbitrary stop position is stopped after rotating. Such effects can be shown to the player, so the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the desired number decoration is stopped rotating at the stopping position, and the movable effect by the rotating decoration 3310 in the back down is made It can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to any stop position , And the number of stop positions of the rotating decorative body 3310 in the back and back is the same, the ability (the grasp of the stop position) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. The player can be entertained by the back and bottom turning ornament 3310 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the back-to-back rotary ornament 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. And the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be further enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (with) the back decoration during the rotation decoration 3310. The area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 like the drive gear 3334 without limiting the area.

[5-9 g. Back-up production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 154 to 161 and the like. Fig. 154 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back is there. FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up raising and lowering decoration unit in the back-up effect unit, and FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the back-raising raising and lowering decoration unit in the back unit. FIG.

  FIG. 159 is an explanatory view showing the rotating mechanism of the back up front rotating decoration in the back up rendering unit from the front. FIG. 160 (a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the back lifting mechanism in the back rendering unit from the front, and FIG. 160 (b) is the back lifting with the back lifting symbol unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a raising / lowering decoration unit and the rotation mechanism of back up back rotation ornament from a front. FIG. 161 is an explanatory view showing the decorative substrate from the front in a state in which the back-up lifting and lowering decoration unit is moved to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit.

  The back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back-back effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the back-up effect unit 3400 has a back-up front rotation decoration 3410 having an axis shaft 3410 a protruding rearward from the center of the back surface, and a back-up front rotation decoration 3410. A shaft shaft 3410a is provided on the back of the back upper front decoration 3421 which extends in the left-right direction at the center in the left and right direction, and the back upper front decoration 3421, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front The front decoration substrate 3422 and the back top front decoration substrate 3422 are provided at the back and the back top front decoration 3421 is attached to the front, and the shaft shaft 3410a of the back top front rotation decoration 3410 is rotatably supported. And a unit base 3423.

  In addition, the back-up effect unit 3400 is mounted between the rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the unit base 3423 whose rotation axis is the front of the rear cover 3424 And a spur gear-like drive gear 3426 attached to the rotation shaft of the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, and a drive gear 3426 meshing with the drive gear 3426. Rotating gear 3427 attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the spur gear-like back side back front rotation decoration 3410 and having a forwardly projecting detection piece 3427a, and back top front decoration substrate 3422 And a back-up rotation detection sensor 3428 attached to the rear surface of the rear gear and capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

  Also, the back-up effect unit 3400 has a back-up lift drive motor 3429 mounted on the back surface of the back cover 3424 so that the rotation axis protrudes into the space between the unit base 3423 and the front, The rear cover 3424 is penetrated from a portion of the motor gear 3430 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3429 and a gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430 and a gear portion 3431a that protrudes outward beyond the circumference of the gear portion. And an elevation cam gear 3431 rotatably mounted on a rear cover 3424. The drive pin 3431b has a cylindrical shape projecting rearward and a detection piece 3431c projecting forward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a. , It is attached to the rear surface of the back top front decoration substrate 3422 and detects the detection piece 3431 c of the lift cam gear 3431 The base end side of the rear cover 3424 in the front-rear direction so that the front end side provided with the back-up back elevation detection sensor 3432 and the back-back back rotation decoration body 3440 is raised and lowered by revolution of the drive pin 3431 b of the lift cam gear 3431 A rear up-and-down decoration unit 3450 rotatably mounted around the axis of the above, and a spring 3433 biasing the back-up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 so that the tip side moves upward. And a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and regulating the upward movement of the back-up lift decorative unit 3450.

  As shown in FIG. 157 and FIG. 158, the back-and-front raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 is a back-on-back decoration in which an axial shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3440 Back-to-back decoration substrate 3452 provided behind body 3451 and back-to-back rear decoration 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and back-to-back back-to-back decoration 3451 And a lift unit base 3453 rotatably mounted on the unit base 3423 and rotatably supporting an axial shaft 3440a of the back-to-back rotary decorative body 3440.

  In addition, the back up and down decoration unit 3450 has a back up rear rotation drive motor 3454 mounted on the front side of the up and down unit base 3453 so that the rotation axis protrudes backward, and a rotation axis of the back up back rotation drive motor 3454 A spur gear-like drive gear 3455 attached to the first gear, a spur gear-like first transmission gear 3456 meshed with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably mounted to the lift unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456 The second transmission gear 3457 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the second gear 3457 and rotatably mounted on the lifting unit base 3453; and the second transmission gear 3457 meshed with the second transmission gear 3457; And a spur gear-like rotating gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

  Furthermore, the back-up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the raising / lowering unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotary gear 3458 from the rear. A motor cover 3460 is attached to the front of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the back up rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

  The back-up pre-rotation decoration 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and has translucency. An axial shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back front front rotation decoration 3410 penetrates the back front front decoration 3421, the back front front decoration substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424. The back surface front decoration 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back surface front rotation decoration 3410 in the center in the left-right direction, and the back petals are placed between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it has been turned to be located at. The entire back upper front decoration body 3421 is translucent.

  The back upper front decoration substrate 3422 extends leftward and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decoration 3421 in the left-right direction. By making the LEDs of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 emit light, it is possible to cause the back upper front rotation decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 to emit light. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 are full color LEDs.

  The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which the back up rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back up and down movement detection sensor 3432 attached to the back surface of the back up front decoration substrate 3422 are respectively inserted. The rear cover 3424 has a cylindrical support shaft 3424a which protrudes rearward from the rear surface coaxially with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back top front rotary decoration 3410, and an arc shape through which the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is inserted. And an elongated slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back-up lifting and lowering decoration unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting and lowering unit base 3453.

  The detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 is detected by an upper back rotation detection sensor 3428 which protrudes through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. The raising and lowering cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and is provided with a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is inserted slidably into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453 in the back-up lift decoration unit 3450 through the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424. Further, the detection piece 3431 c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up and down elevation detection sensor 3432 which protrudes through the through hole 3423 a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

  The back-up and back-turn decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. An axial shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back decoration 3440 penetrates the back decoration 3451, the back decoration substrate 3452, and the lifting unit base 3453, and the lifting unit base 3453 Extends to the back of the Back-up and back decoration 3451 rotates so that the petal on the back side is located between the petals on the front side after overlapping two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up and back rotation decoration 3440 on the front and back It has a decoration of the shape of The entire back-rear back decoration 3451 is translucent.

  The back-up and back decoration substrate 3452 can emit light and decorate the back-up and back rotation decorative body 3440 and the back-up and back decoration 3451 by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. The LEDs on the back top and back decoration substrate 3452 are full color LEDs.

  The lifting unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a, into which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, penetrating back and forth on the base end side (right end side in front view) And an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the axial hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration on the front that imitates a cherry blossom.

  Next, the movement of the back up front rotating decoration 3410, the back up back rotating back decoration 3440, and the back up raising and lowering decoration body unit 3450 in the back up rendering unit 3400 will be described. In the back-up effect unit 3400, in the normal state, the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-up front rotation decoration 3410 is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotation decoration 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 159). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, the back-up front rotation decoration 3410 can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

  Also, in the normal state, the back-up raising and lowering decoration unit 3450 provided with the back-up and back rotation decoration 3440 on the front end side is in a state of extending in the left and right direction, and the whole except the front end side is It is located at the rear of the back upper front decoration body 3421 and is in a state of a retracted position which is not visible from the front (see FIG. 160 (a)). In addition, the site | part protruded to the left rather than the back upper front decoration body 3421 of the back up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 is the state assembled in the game board 5, and is located back of the back front left production unit 3700, It is not visible from the front.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3431 c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up and down elevation detection sensor 3432. In addition, the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is located below the rotation center thereof and near the end far from the shaft hole 34453a in the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453 of the back up lift decoration unit 3450 positioned.

  More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip end side moves downward by the weight of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450, Since the force lines pass through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431 b in contact with the slit 3453 b, the lift cam gear 3431 never rotates. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lift unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back up lift decoration unit 3450 rotates so that the tip end side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the own weight of the back-up lift decorative unit 3450 does not act on the back-up lift drive motor 3429 via the lift unit base 3453 and the lift cam gear 3431.

  In the normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 may be in contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Thereby, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the weight of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is anti-clockwise by the force acting from the slit 34453b through the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453. However, the drive pin 3431b abuts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b can not revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the rotation of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 in the counterclockwise direction can be blocked. .

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-up lift drive motor 3429, the lift cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. As a result, the drive pin 3431 b of the lift cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. As the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b in the direction of the shaft hole 3453a, Due to the weight of the back-up lifting and lowering decoration unit 3450, the lifting and lowering unit base 3453 is pivoted counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3453a so that the tip end side moves downward.

  When the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction and moves upward from a straight line connecting the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3431 and the center of the axial hole 3453a of the lift unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b The slit 3453b slides in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches near the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back-up lift drive motor 3429 stops simultaneously with the drive pin. The revolution of 3431b stops.

  As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the back raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 via the raising / lowering unit base 3453 is stopped, and the tip end side of the back raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 including the back turning back rotation decoration 3440 is In this case, the appearance position is lower than the back upper front decoration 3421 (see FIG. 160 (b)). In the state of this appearance position, the tip side is positioned lower than the back upper front decoration body 3421 than near the center of the back up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450, so the back up back rotation decoration 3440 etc. are visible from the front It will be possible.

  In the state where the back and up and down decoration unit 3450 is at the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the up and down cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to further rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction by the weight of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450, the force's force line is in contact with the slit 3453b. Since the cam passes through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431 b in contact, the lift cam gear 3431 never rotates. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 does not revolve either, so that the lift unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back up lift decoration unit 3450 counterclockwise moves so that the tip side further moves downward from the appearance position. The self-weight of the back-up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back-up raising / lowering drive motor 3429 via the raising / lowering cam gear 3431.

  In the state where the back and up and down decoration unit 3450 is at the appearance position, the raising and lowering cam gear 3431 may be further revolved to abut the drive pin 3431b to the end remote from the shaft hole 3453a of the slit 3453b. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to further rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the weight of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is watched by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453. However, the drive pin 3431b abuts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b can not revolve, and the pivoting of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the pivoting of the back-up lifting decorative unit 3450 in the counterclockwise direction can be blocked. .

  In a state where the back-up lifting and lowering decoration unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the emergence position side, the back-up and back rotation decoration 3440 provided on the tip end side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up back rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up back rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 160 (b)). Therefore, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up back rotation drive motor 3454 when the back-up back rotation decorative body 3440 is visible from the front, the rotating back-up back rotation decoration body 3440 can be viewed visually .

  When the back-up lift decoration unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is raised or lowered by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above by the back-up lift drive motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, and the lifting unit base 3453 is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the tip end side of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 is moved upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431 c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by the lift sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the lift motor 3429 is stopped to set the lift unit 3450 to the retracted position. It can be returned.

  At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back-up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assists the pivoting of the back-up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and raises / lowers back up. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

  In the back-up effect unit 3400 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, the back-up front decoration substrate 3422 is provided behind the back-up front rotation decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration 3421. By appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decoration substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 can be made to emit light. In addition, since the back-up back decoration substrate 3452 is provided behind the back-up back rotation decorative body 3440 and the back-up back decoration body 3451, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up back decoration board 3452 appropriately emit light By doing this, it is possible to make the back-and-back back rotation decoration 3440 and the back-to-back back decoration 3451 emit light.

  At this time, with the back-up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 being turned from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED of the back-up / back decoration substrate 3452 emits light, so that the back-up back rotation decoration decorated with light emission The body 3440 and back side back decoration 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9 h. Back left left production unit]
Subsequently, the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 162 to 168 and the like. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the back and rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) is a perspective view of the back and back left rendering unit in the back unit. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear left rendering unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear left rendering unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear FIG. Fig. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration left decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 166 is a view from the back of the back decoration left decoration unit disassembled and the back decoration left decoration unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back rear left rendering unit from the front. FIG. 168 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear left decoration unit in the back rear left rendering unit.

  The back-rear left rendering unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010, in front of the left side of the back-back rendering unit 3100. The back left left rendering unit 3500 has a light transmitting back rotatable left back decorative member 3510 having a light transmitting property that can rotate around an axis in the front and rear direction, and a back back left rotating decorative member 3510 rotatably on the lower end side. The rear left decoration unit 3520 and the back rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear left decoration unit 3520 around the longitudinal axis. .

  The back and left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back and left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back left rotation decorative body 3510 has an axial shaft 3510 a cylindrically protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 166).

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 has a back rear left decoration 3521 and a back rear left decoration, in which an axial shaft 3510 a of the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 penetrates at the center. A back-rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and mounted from the back of the back-rear decoration substrate 3522 to the back side of the back-rear decoration 3521 The back cover is attached to the front cover 3523 rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3510a of the left rotation decorative body 3510 and the back side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side is rotatably attached to the back drive left drive unit 3550 And a movable base 3524.

  Also, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is mounted on the back surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotation axis protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523. A spur gear-like drive gear 3526 attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525 and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510 a of the back left rotation decoration body 3510 And a gear-shaped rotating gear 3527.

  The back decoration left decoration body 3521 of the back decoration left decoration body unit 3520 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back rotation left rotation decoration body 3510 are stacked back and forth. The petals on the side are shaped as if they were rotated to lie between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are full color LEDs.

  The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape combining a part having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decorative body 3521 and a part extending in a rectangular shape from the upper left of the part to the top in a front view . In the front cover 3523, decorations of a plurality of cherry blossoms are formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3523 is formed in the shape of a shallow container opened rearward.

  The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends upward than the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has an axial hole 3524a penetrating in the front and rear direction on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3524b cylindrically projecting forward at a position away from the axial hole 3524a. In the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524, the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the back rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. Also, the actuating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

  When the back decoration left rotation unit 3520 rotates the drive gear 3526 by the back rotation left rotation drive motor 3525, the back decoration left rotation decoration 3510 is engaged with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of orientation.

  The back-rear left drive unit 3550, as shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a rotatably supporting the back-rear left decoration unit 3520. The vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front of the reinforcing plate 3551 and mounted in the back box 3010, the unit cover 3553 attached to the front of the unit base 3552, and the upper front of the unit cover 3553 rotate Back-and-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 mounted so that the shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553 and spur gear motor gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the back-left elevating drive motor 3554 And 3555.

  In addition, the rear back left drive unit 3550 is in mesh with the motor gear 3555 and has a spur gear transmission gear 3556 rotatably mounted on the unit cover 3553 and a spur gear gear portion 3557a meshing with the transmission gear 3556. An elevation cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b cylindrically projecting backward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a and a detection piece 3557c projecting forward from the vicinity of the front outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a; The first slit 3558a extending in the left and right direction into which the drive pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted, and the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decoration unit 3520 extending left and right under the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b slidably inserted therein , A, a link member 3558 are slidably mounted in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

  Furthermore, the back-rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 biasing the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the lift cam gear 3557, and a unit cover A back rear left lift detection sensor 3562 mounted on the front of the 3553 and a back rear left relay substrate 3561 and a back rear left relay substrate 3561 that can detect the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557; Is equipped.

  The reinforcing plate 3551 of the back left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551 a protrudes forward at the upper portion. The support shaft 3551 a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3524 a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decoration unit 3520.

  The unit base 3552 extends in the vertical direction longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551 a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends in the vertical direction substantially the same length as the unit base 3552 and is formed in the shape of a shallow container opened rearward.

  In the lift cam gear 3557, the drive pin 3557b penetrates the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 and is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. The detection piece 3557 c penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes backward, and is detected by a back-rear left elevation detection sensor 3562. The link member 3558 extends vertically and is provided with a first slit 3558a near the upper end and a second slit 3558b at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3559 is attached to the link member 3558, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3560.

  The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the lift cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back relay left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the back drive left decoration board 3522, the back back left rotation drive motor 3525, the back back left lift drive motor 3554, and the back back left lift detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720 It is to do.

  Next, the operation of the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 167 and FIG. 168 (a), the back rendering left rendering unit 3500 is provided with the back rear left rotating ornament 3510 on the lower end side (tip end side). The unit 3520 is in the retracted position where it is suspended. In this normal state, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 (the back rear left rotation decoration 3510) is located behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 and can not be viewed from the front (the player side). It has become.

  Also, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front left rendering unit 3700, and the back-rear left lift drive motor Only part of 3554 is facing forward (see FIG. 131 etc.). When the back drive drive motor 3554 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the part facing forward of the left drive motor 3554 is covered by the part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 on the player side. From the point of view (see FIG. 135).

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3557 c of the raising and lowering cam gear 3557 is detected by the back-rear left elevation detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557 b of the lift cam gear 3557 is positioned directly below the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3557 and is positioned near the left end in the first slit 3558 a of the link member 3558. In the normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the actuating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is The link member 3558 is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b.

  In this normal state, the spring 3559 urges the link member 3558 to move upward, but the normal passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3558a in the drive pin 3557b of the lift cam gear 3557 is Since it passes through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force is applied to the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in either direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 (back rear left rotation decoration 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551 a) of the movable base 325 from the retracted position. There is no rotation, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the back and rear left elevation drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558 and the elevation cam gear 3557 and the like.

  In the normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the lift cam gear 3557 may be in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Thus, when the link member 3558 tries to move upward by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the lifting cam gear 3557 tends to rotate clockwise by the force acting from the first slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the lift cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left, but the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. However, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the raising and lowering cam gear 3557 so that the back rear left decoration unit 3520 can be prevented from pivoting from the retracted position.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-rear left lift drive motor 3554, the lift cam gear 3557 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. As a result, the drive pin 3557b of the lift cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves counterclockwise, it slides inside the first slit 3558a to the right while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

  When the link member 3558 moves upward, the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the back rear left decoration unit 3520 protruding downward and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 is pivoted counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the actuating pin 3524b is slid rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the back decoration unit 3520 is It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 168 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3559, and the load applied to the rear lifting motor 3554 is reduced.

  Thus, by rotating the back decoration left decoration unit 3520 in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a, the back rotation decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. While moving back upward, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right with respect to the back front left rendering unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

  In the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the raising / lowering cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state (state of the retracted position) in the counterclockwise direction. The position is taken as the first appearance position (see FIG. 168 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back and rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  Then, when the lift cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to a position just above the revolution center (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear lifting motor 3554 stops and the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, and the counterclockwise rotation of the back decoration left decorative unit 3520 is stopped, resulting in the second appearance position (FIG. 168 (c See)). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated approximately 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  When the back decoration left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557 b is located directly above the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3557. In this state, the weight of the back rear left decoration unit 3520 exerts a force to turn the back rear left decoration unit 3520 clockwise about the support shaft 3551 a, and the force causes the movable base to move. The link member 3558 tries to move downward through the 3524 actuating pin 3524b and the second slit 3558b, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located directly above the center of revolution Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

  Therefore, since the lift cam gear 3557 does not rotate because the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the back rear left decoration unit 3520 rotates from the state of the second appearance position In addition, the force by the weight of the back rear left decoration unit 3520 does not act on the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558 and the elevation cam gear 3557 and the like.

  When the rear decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the lift cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the link member 3558 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3524b by the back rear left decoration unit 3520 trying to turn clockwise around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight. The lift cam gear 3557 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the one slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move leftward, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Also, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is blocked, and the back rear left decoration unit 3520 can be locked in a non-rotatable manner in the state of the second appearance position.

  In the state where the back decoration left decoration unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player's side) It becomes visible from

  In the back rear left decoration unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 is engaged via the rotation gear 3527 meshed with the drive gear 3526, It can be rotated about a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 167). Therefore, when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525 when the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 is visible from the front (player's side), the rotating back back left rotation decoration 3510 is It can be made visible to the player.

  When the back decoration left decoration unit 3520 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is a normal state, the motor gear 3555 is reversed by the back raising left and right drive motor 3554. The link member 3558 can be moved downward by the rotation of the drive pin 3557b of the lift cam gear 3557 by rotating in the direction of d. With the movement of the link member 3558 downward, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 It will turn in the direction of the retraction position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the back rear left lift unit 3520 is stopped by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back lift left lift drive motor 3554 It can be returned to the position state.

  In the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167, since the back-rear left decoration substrate 3522 is provided behind the back-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-rear left decorative body 3521, By appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, the back rear left rotary decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be made to emit light. At this time, the light emitting decoration is made by causing the LEDs of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 to emit light in a state where the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side. The back and left rotation ornament 3510 and the back and left decoration 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Right behind the back production unit]
Subsequently, the back and rear right rendering unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 169 to 175 and the like. Fig. 169 (a) is a perspective view of a back unit in the back unit, viewed from the front, and Fig. 169 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit in the back unit, viewed from the back. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the back production right rendering unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back FIG. Fig. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration right decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 173 is a view from the back of the back decoration right decoration unit disassembly It is the disassembled perspective view seen. FIG. 174 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back rear right rendering unit from the front. FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear right decoration unit in the back rear right rendering unit.

  The back-to-back right rendering unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided in front of the right side of the back-to-back rendering unit 3100 near the right end in the back box 3010. The back right rendering unit 3600 is a back supporting the back right rotation decoration 3610 having a light transmitting property that can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction and the back right rotation decoration 3610 at the lower end side. A rear right decoration unit 3620 and a back rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in a back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear right decoration unit 3620 about an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. .

  The back-to-back right-turn decorative body 3610 of the back-to-back right rendering unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back right rotation decorative body 3610 has an axial shaft 3610 a cylindrically projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 172).

  As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 has a back rear right decoration 3621 in which an axial shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 penetrates at the center, and a back rear right decoration A back-to-right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the 3621 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front, and mounted from the back of the back-to-back decorative substrate 3622 to the back side of the back-to-right decorative body 3621 The back cover is attached to the front cover 3623 rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3610a of the right rotation decorative body 3610, and to the rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side is rotatably attached to the back drive right drive unit 3650 And a movable base 3624.

  Also, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 is mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotation axis protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623. A spur gear-like drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625 and a flat gear engaged with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610 a of the back right rotation decoration body 3610 And a gear-like rotation gear 3627.

  Back to back Right back decoration 3621 has a light transmitting property and two back cherry blossoms of the same size as the back turn right rotation decoration 3610 are stacked back and forth. The petals on the side are shaped as if they were rotated to lie between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs of the back decoration right decoration substrate 3622 are full color LEDs.

  The front cover 3623 is formed as a combination of a part having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decoration 3621 and a part extending in a rectangular shape from the upper right of the part in the front view. . In the front cover 3623, decorations of a plurality of cherry blossoms are formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3623 is formed in the shape of a shallow container opened rearward.

  The movable base 3624 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends upward than the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has an axial hole 3624a penetrating in the front and rear direction on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3624b cylindrically projecting forward at a position away from the axial hole 3624a. In the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624, the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the back right drive unit 3650 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3624 b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624 a.

  When the back decoration right rotation unit 3620 rotates the drive gear 3626 by the back rotation right rotation drive motor 3625, the back decoration right rotation decoration body 3610 is back and forth through the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of orientation.

  As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the back right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651 rotatably supporting the back right decoration unit 3620. , A vertically extending unit base 3652 mounted on the front of the reinforcing plate 3651 and mounted in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 mounted on the front of the unit base 3652; and a unit cover It is mounted on the rotary shaft of the back-right drive motor 3654 and the back-right drive motor 3554 so that the rotary shaft projects between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653 at the top of the front of the 3653. And a spur gear-like motor gear 3655.

  In addition, the back right drive unit 3650 has a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b projecting cylindrically from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c projecting forward from near the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending in the left and right direction in which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit The unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653 have a second slit 3658b which extends left and right below the 3658a and into which the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decoration unit 3620 is slidably inserted. And a link portion slidably mounted in the vertical direction between It is provided with a 3658, a.

  Furthermore, the back-right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 biasing the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the lift cam gear 3657, and a unit cover A back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 which is attached to the front of the back 653 and is attached to the rear surface of the back rear right relay substrate 3661 and can detect the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657; A lower base 3663 is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652, and on the front surface, the lower part of the unit cover 3653 is attached.

  The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending in the vertical direction, and a support shaft 3651 a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3651 a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3624 a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decoration unit 3620.

  The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651 a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends in the vertical direction substantially the same length as the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed in the shape of a shallow container opened rearward.

  In the lift cam gear 3657, the drive pin 3657b penetrates the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660 and is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. The detection piece 3657 c is detected by a back and up and down movement detection sensor 3662 which protrudes backward by penetrating the unit cover 3653. The link member 3658 extends vertically and is provided with a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3659 is attached to the link member 3658, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3660.

  The partition plate 3660 has a semicircular arc-shaped slit 3660 a through which the drive pin 3657 b of the lift cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back relay right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back drive right decoration board 3622, the back back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back back right lift drive motor 3654, and the back back right lift detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720 It is to do.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-rear right rendering unit 3600 will be described. In the normal condition, as shown in FIG. 174 and FIG. 175 (a), the back right rendering unit 3600 is provided with the back right rotation decoration 3610 at the lower end side (tip end side). The unit 3620 is in the retracted position where it is suspended. In this normal state, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 (the back rear right rotation decoration 3610) is located behind the back front right rendering unit 3800 and can not be viewed from the front (the player side). It has become.

  Also, in a normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back-rear right rendering unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decoration 3040 and the back front right rendering unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player's side) It is not visible from

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the raising and lowering cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right raising and lowering detection sensor 3662. In the normal state, the drive pin 3657 b of the lift cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3657 and is located near the right end in the first slit 3658 a of the link member 3658. In the normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the actuating pin 3624 b located on the left side of the shaft hole 3624 a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decoration unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is located near the right end in the second slit 3658 b.

  In this normal state, the spring 3659 urges the link member 3658 to move upward, but the normal passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a in the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is Since it passes through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force is applied to the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in either direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 (back rear right rotation decoration 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651 a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. There is no rotation, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the back rear right elevation drive motor 3554 via the link member 3658, the elevation cam gear 3657 and the like.

  In the normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 may be in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. Thus, when the link member 3658 tries to move upward by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lift cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3658a through the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right, but the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. However, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the raising and lowering cam gear 3657, so that the back rear right decoration unit 3620 can be prevented from pivoting from the retracted position.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear-rear right elevation drive motor 3554, the elevation cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the elevation cam gear 3657 The drive pin 3657b is rotated in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, it slides inside the first slit 3658a left while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. It becomes.

  When the link member 3658 moves upward, the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the back rear right decoration unit 3620 protruding below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 is rotated clockwise about the support shaft 3651a while being pushed to the left while the actuating pin 3624b slides in the second slit 3658b, and the back decoration right decoration unit 3620 is retracted. It will rotate from the position in the clockwise direction (see FIGS. 175 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the back raising / lowering drive motor 3564 is reduced.

  In this manner, by rotating the back decoration right decoration unit 3620 clockwise around the support shaft 3651 a, the back rotation right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side moves leftward while moving to the left. The back rotating right turn decorative body 3610 moves to the left relative to the back front right rendering unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (the player side).

  In the back-to-back right rendering unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the pivoting position of the back-to-back right decoration unit 3620 when the lift cam gear 3657 rotates approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (state of retracted position) Is a first appearance position (see FIG. 175 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated approximately 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  Then, when the lift cam gear 3657 is further rotated in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to a position just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back lift drive motor 3554 is stopped and the revolution of the drive pin 3657b is stopped. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, and the back rotation of the right decoration unit 3620 in the clockwise direction is stopped, resulting in the second appearance position (FIG. 175 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated approximately 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  When the back decoration right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3657. In this state, the back weight of the back decoration right decoration unit 3620 exerts a force to turn the back decoration right decoration unit 3620 in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651 a, and the force causes the back decoration to move. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3624b and the second slit 3658b of the base 3624, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

  Therefore, since the lift cam gear 3657 does not rotate because the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the back rear right decoration unit 3620 rotates from the state of the second appearance position There is no possibility that the back weight of the back decoration unit 3620 is due to its own weight acting on the back height raising / lowering drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658 and the elevation cam gear 3657.

  When the back decoration right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the lift cam gear 3657 is further rotated clockwise so that the drive pin 3657b abuts on the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3624 b by the back rear right decoration unit 3620 trying to rotate counterclockwise about the support shaft 3651 a by its own weight. The lift cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3658a through the drive pin 3657b. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Also, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is blocked, and the back rear right decoration unit 3620 can be locked so as not to rotate in the state of the second appearance position.

  In the state where the back decoration right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back right rotation decoration 366 provided on the lower end side is forward (player's side) It becomes visible from

  In the back rear right decoration unit 3620, the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated via the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626 by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625. It can be rotated about a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 174). Therefore, when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back right rotation drive motor 3625 when the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 is visible from the front (player's side), the rotating back back right rotation decoration 3610 is It can be made visible to the player.

  When the back decoration right decoration unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is a normal state, the motor gear 3655 is reversed by the back raising right elevating drive motor 365 The link member 3658 can be moved downward by revolving the drive pin 3657b of the raising / lowering cam gear 3657 by rotating in the direction of (1). With the downward movement of the link member 3658, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 It will turn in the direction of the retraction position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the back rear right lift drive motor 3554 stops the rotation of the motor gear 3655 to retract the back rear right decoration unit 3620 It can be returned to the position state.

  In the back-to-back right rendering unit 3600 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 174, the back-to-back right decoration substrate 3622 is provided behind the back-to-right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back-to-back right decorative body 3621. By appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decoration substrate 3622, the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 and the back rear right decoration 3621 can be made to emit light. At this time, the light emission decoration is performed by causing the LEDs of the back decoration right decoration substrate 3622 to emit light in a state where the back decoration right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side. It is possible to show the player the back-and-right rotation decoration 3610 and the back-right decoration 3621 that are being played.

[5-9 j. Back front left production unit]
Subsequently, the back front left rendering unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 176 to 179 and the like. FIG. 176 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 176 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 177 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left rendering unit, and FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left rendering unit. And is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 179 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in a closed state in the back front left rendering unit, and FIG. 179 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in an open state in the back front left rendering unit.

  The back front left rendering unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is positioned behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left rendering unit 3700 includes, in order from the top, a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. The body unit 3710 is configured.

  In the back front left rendering unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 179, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is compared to the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C, It is inclined obliquely so that the upper end side moves to the right. Further, the shape of the back cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from those of the second back front left decoration unit 3710 B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710 C.

  As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the back front left decoration unit 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 has a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating back and forth and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711 The shutter support member 3712 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 are vertically aligned and supported rotatably around an axis in the left-right direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3730.

  In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and has a light transmitting flat plate back front left decoration 3713 and a back front left decoration 3713. It is attached to the front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decoration substrate 3714 on the front side and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted and the back front left decoration substrate 3714 from the back, and back back left rendering unit And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front of the 3500.

  Furthermore, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front. The transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger in the left drive solenoid 3717 and the support plate 3716 are rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, by advancing and retracting the transmission member 3718 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717 A link member 3719 which rotates and an open / close slider 3720 which slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open and close the shutter unit 3730 are provided.

  The front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 is formed in an outer shape with a “convex” character turned to the right and a rounded corner (a shape obtained by stylizing “pine”). The shutter support member 3712 has a plurality of bearing portions 3712 a rotatably supporting the shaft portions 3733 of the shutter members 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712 b cylindrically projecting forward from near the left end of the front surface. The boss 3712 b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720 b of the open / close slider 3720, and the support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 has a flat plate-like shutter 3732 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending cylindrically from both ends in the left and right direction of the shutter 3732, and a left end after protruding in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 And a crankshaft 3734 extending cylindrically in the direction of the arrow.

  The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is disposed with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 in a state where the surface of the shutter 3732 is directed forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3733.

  The shutter member 3731 can be pivoted about a shaft in the left-right direction about the shaft portion 3733 by the shaft portion 3733 being rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712 a of the shutter support member 3712. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720 a of the opening / closing slider 3720.

  The back front left decorative body 3713 is not shown, but has a pattern such as a character, an item, a logo or the like in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front left decoration 3713 can diffuse the light from the LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714. The plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are full color LEDs.

  The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent rightward on the front end side attached to the front surface of the boss 3712 b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a which is cylindrically projecting rightwardly from near the lower end. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

  The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in a direction in which the plunger advances and retracts downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. The link member 3719 can be pivoted about an axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3716a by inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716. The link member 3719 has a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 at the rear side and a second connected to the opening / closing slider 3720 with the portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted. The connection portion 3719 b is provided on the front side.

  The opening / closing slider 3720 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 including the plurality of shutter members 3731 and is a transmission groove in which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably slidable in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front left rendering unit 3700 will be described. In the normal condition, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), the back front left rendering unit 3700 has a plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 with the surface thereof facing forward. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732 of FIG. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is not visible from the front (player side). In addition, although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in a closed state, the front of the shutter unit 3730 (plural shutters 3732) has a pattern different from the pattern on the back front left decoration 3713 It is done.

  In the normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In the normal state, the opening / closing slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3724 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

  In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger is upward. Move to When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates around the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connection portion 3719b opposite to the first connection portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connection portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the open / close slider 3720 connected to the second connection portion 3719b to move downward.

  By moving the opening / closing slider 3720 downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates around the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3730 The left decorative body 3713 is visible from the front (see FIG. 179 (b)).

  Thereafter, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is de-energized (OFF), the plunger which has been moved upward is moved downward by the biasing force of the spring, and the movement opposite to the above is performed, The open shutter unit 3730 can return to the normal closed state.

  As described above, according to the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3730 is opened and closed by the back front left driving solenoid 3717 so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730 can be obtained. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of to make the player enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front left decoration substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decoration 3713, the plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 emit light when the shutter unit 3730 is closed. Then, the shutter unit 3730 lighted and decorated can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are lighted to make the light emission decorated back front left The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, in the back front left rendering unit 3700, the three back front left decoration units of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A, the second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. Since the 3710 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and emit light and decorate, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects by the three back left decoration units 3710. I can show it.

[5-9 k. Right behind the back production unit]
Subsequently, the back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183 and the like. FIG. 180 (a) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 (b) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of one back front decoration unit in the back front right rendering unit, and FIG. 182 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration unit in the back front right rendering unit And is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 183 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the closed state in the back front right rendering unit, and FIG. 183 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the open front state in the back front right rendering unit.

  The back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right rendering unit 3600 so that the upper portion near the right end is positioned behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010 . The back front right rendering unit 3800 includes, from top to bottom, a first back front right decoration unit 3810 A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810 B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810 C, three back front right decorations The body unit 3810 is configured.

  In the back front right rendering unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 183, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C, It is inclined obliquely so that the upper end side moves to the left. Also, the shape of the back cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decoration unit 3810 B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810 C.

  The back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right rendering unit 3800 is, as shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating back and forth, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811 The shutter support member 3812 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 are vertically aligned and supported rotatably around an axis in the left-right direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3830.

  In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and has a light transmitting flat plate back front right decoration 3813 and the back front right decoration 3813. It is attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the back right decoration substrate 3814 provided on the back and multiple LEDs mounted on the front and the back front right decoration substrate 3814 from the back, and the back rear right rendering unit And a rear cover 3815 attached to the front of the 3600.

  Furthermore, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front. The transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and the support plate 3816 are rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, and are advanced and retracted by the transmission member 3818 by the back right drive solenoid 3817 A link member 3819 which rotates and an opening / closing slider 3820 which slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830 are provided.

  The front cover 3811 of the back right front decoration unit 3810 is formed in an outer shape with a “convex” character turned to the left and rounded corners (a shape obtained by stylizing “pine”). The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812 a rotatably supporting the shaft portions 3833 of the shutter members 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. In addition, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss 3812 b cylindrically projecting forward from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss 3812 b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820 b of the open / close slider 3820, and the support plate 3816 is attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 has a flat plate-like shutter 3832 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending cylindrically from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3832, and a right-handed shaft portion 3833 And Crankshaft 3834 extending in a cylindrical shape.

  The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is disposed with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3832 in a state where the surface of the shutter 3832 is directed forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located rearward of the shaft 3833.

  The shutter member 3831 can be pivoted about an axis in the left-right direction about the shaft portion 3833 by the shaft portion 3833 being rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812 a of the shutter support member 3812. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820 a of the open / close slider 3820.

  Although the illustration of the back right front decoration 3813 is omitted, a pattern such as a character, an item, a logo or the like in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The back front right decoration 3813 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814. The plurality of LEDs on the back front right decoration substrate 3814 are full color LEDs.

  The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. The left side of the support plate 3816 is bent at the front end side to be attached to the front surface of the boss 3812 b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. The support plate 3816 also has a support pin 3816 a cylindrically projecting leftward from near the lower end. The support pin 3816 a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

  The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in a direction in which the plunger advances and retracts downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. The link member 3819 can be pivoted about an axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3816 a by inserting the support pin 3816 a of the support plate 3816. The link member 3819 has a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side and a second connected to the opening / closing slider 3820 with the portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted. The connection portion 3819 b is provided on the front side.

  The opening / closing slider 3820 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 including the plurality of shutter members 3831, and is a transmission groove in which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably slidable in the front-rear direction. It has 3820a and a slit 3820b in which the boss 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front right rendering unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has a plurality of shutters 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 facing forward as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832 of FIG. In this normal state, the back front right decoration 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is not visible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in a closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear right front decoration 3813 is applied to the front of the shutter unit 3830 (plural shutters 3832). It is done.

  In the normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in the non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In the normal state, the open / close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3824 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

  In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger is upward Move to When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates around the support pin 3816a. Thus, the second connection portion 3819b opposite to the first connection portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connection portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the open / close slider 3820 connected to the second connection portion 3819b to move downward.

  When the opening / closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820 a is pressed downward, so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned below the shaft part 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 is in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3830 The right decorative body 3813 is visible from the front (see FIG. 183 (b)).

  After that, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is de-energized (OFF), the plunger which has been moved upward is moved downward by the biasing force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction to the above, The open shutter unit 3830 can return to the normal closed state.

  As described above, according to the back front right rendering unit 3800 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3830 is opened and closed by the back front right solenoid 3817 so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830 can be used. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of to make the player enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decoration 3813, the plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 emit light when the shutter unit 3830 is closed. The shutter unit 3830 illuminated and decorated can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs of the back right front decoration substrate 3814 are illuminated to illuminate the rear right and back illuminated right The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, in the back front right rendering unit 3800, the three back front right decoration units of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A, the second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the 3810 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3830 and emit light and decorate, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back right decoration units 3810. I can show it.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 184 to 189 and the like. FIG. 184 is a front view of the game board showing the back rear movable decorative body of the back rear effect unit moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 185 is a front view of the gaming board shown in the state in which the back-to-back inside rotation decorative body of the back-to-back inside effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 186 shows the back-to-back rotation decorative body from the back position to the appearance position, and the back-to-back left rotation unit from the back position to the first appearance position, and back to the right It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decorative body of the effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position in a state of being moved respectively. FIG. 187 shows the back rear left rotating unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back right rotating unit from the back position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 188 is a front view of the gaming board, showing the shutter unit of the back front left rendering unit and the shutter unit of the back front right rendering unit from the closed state to the open state.

  In FIG. 189, the back rear movable decorative body from the back position to the emergence position from the back rear effect unit, the back up back to the back effect of the back effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back back left effect unit The left-turn decoration from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back-right rotation unit from the back to the right-turn decoration from the withdrawal position to the first appearance position, and the back-rear middle-turn decoration It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved from the lowered position to the raised position.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. In the normal state, since the upper left unit 2300, the first attachment unit 2400, the center character 2500, the second attachment unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are substantially entirely transparent. As shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decoration 3030, the back front right decoration 3040, and the back bottom left presentation unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100, and the back left rotation of the presentation unit 3200. Decoration body 3201, back and bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, back and bottom inside production unit 3250 The back decoration of the cover 3300, the back decoration of the back effect unit 3400, the back decoration of the back effect unit 3410 and the back decoration, the front cover 3711 of the left effect unit 3700, the shutter unit 3730, the back front The front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the right rendering unit 3800 can be viewed well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well through the frame of the center character 2500. be able to.

  Further, in detail, the back front left decoration 3030 is located on the left side of the center character 2500 and the back front right decoration 3040 is attached to the right rail 1005 from the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000. Along the side right middle unit 2700 is located near. In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the back upper effect unit 3400 and can not be viewed from the player side.

  In addition, the back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 is located below the frame of the center character 2500 and at the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side, and the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 Is located at the rear of the first winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 below the frame of the center character 2500. The back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 and the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is positioned behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 so that the upper part protrudes into the frame of the center character 2500. ing. Since the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 has a perspective from above obliquely from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, the numeral decoration above the center of rotation is passed through the frame of the center character 2500. It can be viewed well.

  Furthermore, the back upper front decoration body 3421 of the back upper effect unit 3400 extends leftward and rightward in the upper part of the game area 5a in a front view, and the upper left part from the center in the left and right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and center character As well as being visible through 2500, the rest can be well viewed through the frame of center character 2500. The back surface front rotation decoration 3410 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back surface front decoration 3421, and it is good from the player side through the frame of the center character 2500. It can be viewed on the The back-up raising / lowering decoration unit 3450 having the back-up / back-turn decoration 3440 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is in the state of the retracted position behind the back-up front decoration 3421 in the normal state. It is not visible from the side.

  Also, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 having the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 in the back rear left rendering unit 3500 is in the state of a retracted position behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 in the normal state. , It is not visible from the player side. In addition, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 having the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 in the back rear right rendering unit 3600 is in the state of a retracted position behind the back front right rendering unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is not visible from the player side.

  Further, the three back front left decoration units 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 are vertically aligned along the left side of the game panel 1100 and are transparently located in the game area 5a in a front view. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center character 2500, and the frame of the center character 2500. Of the three back front left decoration units 3710, the upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center character 2500 in front view, The lower part is located within the center character 2500 frame. The second back front left decoration unit 3710 B on the inner side is located in the frame of the center character 2500 in a front view. Most of the lower third back front left decorative unit 3710 C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center part 2500 in front view, and the right part is in the frame of the center part 2500. positioned.

  In the back front left rendering unit 3700, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decoration units 3710, and the back front left decoration 371 is not visible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

  Furthermore, the three back front decoration units 3810 of the back front right rendering unit 3800 are vertically aligned along the right side of the game panel 1100 and are transparently located in the game area 5a in a front view. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center character 2500, and the frame of the center character 2500. Of the three back front right decoration units 3810, the upper first back front right decoration unit 3810A is located to the rear of the transparent game panel 1100 and the center character 2500 on the right side in front view, The left side is located within the center character 2500 frame. The second back front right decoration unit 3810B on the inner side and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C on the lower side are transparent game panel 1100 and the center on the right side from the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in front view It is located behind the character 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center character 2500.

  In the back front right rendering unit 3800, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decoration units 3810 in a normal state, and the back front right decoration 3813 is not visible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

  According to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, the game board 5 is set to perform the back of the back unit 3000. Unit 3100, back left bottom production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom inside production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back back left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 And, the back front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (a movable effect or a light emission effect).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back-to-back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 184, the lock member 3134 is moved downward by moving the slide guide 3130 by the back-to-back drive motor 3126. Is released, and the back movable movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the emerging position. This makes it possible to show the player an effect (a movable effect) in which the large back rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction intercepts the display screen of the effect display device 1600 As a result, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) occurs in which the player has an advantage over the player. It can make you think that it is not, and you can make the expectation for the game increase.

  Although this illustration is omitted in the back-to-back effect unit 3100, after the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the back-to-back drive motor 3126 is caused to move the slide guide 3130 upward, and the back-to-back movable decorative body At the time of returning 3110 to the retracted position, the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 is properly changed via the slide guide 3130 by changing the forward and reverse rotation of the back and rear drive motor 3126 appropriately. It may be made to move up and down in the vicinity of the center of the direction. As a result, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the vertical direction, so the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back rear movable decoration 3110 and the back back The movable decorative body 3110 can be noticed, and the back and forth movement of the movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

  As an effect using the back and bottom inside rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 185, the lifting and lowering arm 3357 is rotated by the back and bottom inside lifting and lowering drive motor 3352 to turn the back and bottom inside decoration unit 3320. Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the back-to-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates the back-to-back middle rotation decoration 3310 about the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center character 2500 so as to block part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600, which is good from the player side In addition, the player can have a strong impact on the player and can entertain the player because the player rotates in a circle.

  Since the back decoration in the back rotation decoration 3310 is provided with six number decorations, by rotating the back rotation inside rotation decoration 3310, the impression that the roulette is also rotating to the player Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the back decoration member 3310 during rotation, the effect display device 1600 displays a rendering image such as “Tsing Roku” and the numeral of the numeral decoration of the back decoration member 3310 is stopped. The "piece" may be advanced according to As a result, the player is harassed or not depending on whether or not the rotating back-and-back rotating ornament 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration so that the "piece" proceeds to the desired "twill". It can be exciting and can entertain the player. In addition, the player can feel as if the expectation value is increasing by advancing the “piece”, and the sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  As effects using the back-down left rendering unit 3200, the back-down right rendering unit 3250, the back-up rendering unit 3400, the back-back left rendering unit 3500, and the back-right rendering unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, the back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201 is rotated by the back bottom left drive motor 3205 in the back bottom left rendering unit 3200, and the back bottom right rotation decoration body is reversed by the back bottom right driving motor 3255 in the back bottom right rendering unit 3250. Rotate 3251. In the back-up effect unit 3400, the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back-up front rotation decoration 3410, and the back-up lifting drive motor 3429 lowers the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 from the retracted position. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back-up back rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up back rotation decoration body 3440. Furthermore, the back rear left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 in the back rear left rendering unit 3500 moves the back rear left decoration unit 3520 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 The left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. In addition, the back rear right raising / lowering drive motor 3554 is used to move the back rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper left in the back rear right rendering unit 3600, and the back back right rotation drive motor 3625 The right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated.

  Thereby, the back-up back rotation decoration 3440, the back-back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back-back right rotation decoration 3610 move forward to the effect display device 1600 and become visible while the back-down left rotation decoration The body 3201, back right turn decoration 3251, back front rotation decoration 3410, back up back rotation decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration 3510, and back back right rotation decoration 3610, respectively, By rotating the six decoration bodies, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to make the expectation of the game to be heightened by thinking that something good will happen.

  At this time, the back-up lift drive motor 3429, the back-back left lift drive motor 3554, and the back-back right lift drive motor 3554 are repeated as needed, forward and reverse reverse, and the back up lift decoration unit 3450, back back left decoration The body unit 3520 and the back rear right decoration unit 3620 may be respectively rocked. This allows the player's interest to be drawn strongly, as the back and back rotating decorative body 3440, the back and back left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back and right rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while fluttering, The player can be entertained.

  In addition, at this time, the rotating decoration 3310 may be rotated during the back down. This makes it possible for the player to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) may occur to the player since the seven decorative bodies rotate in a circle. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  As effects using the back-to-back left rendering unit 3500 and back-to-back right rendering unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 187, back-to-back left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 in back-to-back left rendering unit 3500 The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the back rotation rotation motor 3525 is used to rotate the back rotation left rotation decoration body 3510. In addition, the back rear right raising / lowering drive motor 3554 in the back rear right rendering unit 3600 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper left, and the back rear right driving motor 3625 backs back right The rotating decoration 3610 is rotated. As a result, the player's eyes seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two decorative bodies rotate at an approximate height, so there is something good to surprise the player. It can be made to think whether or not, and it can be made to raise expectation for a game.

  At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back and left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back and right rotating decorative body 3610 of the second appearance position are the eyes of the face of the predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1. You may make it display an effect image which becomes a position. As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect that the eyes of the character are turning round and round, and the player can be entertained.

  As effects using the back front left rendering unit 3700 and the back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 188, the back front left driving solenoid 3717 in the back front left rendering unit 3700 At the same time, the shutter unit 3830 is switched from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800. As a result, since the back front left decoration body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decoration body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side, the back front left decoration body 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, as an effect using the back front left rendering unit 3700 and the back front right rendering unit 3800, each has three back front left decoration units 3710 and three back front right decoration units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed in combination. A combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 opening and closing Thus, various effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Back unit 3000 in the back unit 3000, back left down production unit 3200, back down right production unit 3250, back down in the middle production unit 3300, back up production unit 3400, back left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 189, all the decorative bodies and the like may be moved. By this,
By moving all the decorative bodies, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) will occur, and it is possible to increase an expectation for the advantageous gaming state. In this case, in the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 and the back-back right rendering unit 3600, the back-back left decoration unit 3520 and the back-back right decoration unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing this, the back contact with the movable decoration 3110 is avoided.

  In the above, although the movable of each decorative body has been described, when moving each decorative body, the player is provided with a light-emitting effect of the decorative body by appropriately emitting the LED of the decorative substrate provided behind It can be shown and attract more attention of the player.

  Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect and the light emission effect can be appropriately combined, and are also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 be able to. As a result, by appropriately combining the light emission effect, the movable effect, the display effect, etc., effects of various patterns can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and by various effects. The player can be entertained, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, as shown in FIG. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the gaming ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first start opening sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received by the first start opening 2002, and a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed the gate unit 2003, the second The second start opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the start opening 2004, the general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the first winning opening 2005 The first large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B, the second large winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting the gaming ball B accepted for the second large winning opening 2006, and the gaming ball B accepted for the out opening 2010 Out port sensor 3053; first sub out port sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub out port 2011; second sub out port Detection signals from the second sub out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received at 012 and the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3555, etc. for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are main control I / O, respectively. Input via port.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, whereby the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid Output a drive signal to 2612, etc., or from the main control I / O port the status indicator of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol indicator, the normal hold indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special hold number indicator The drive signal is output to the device, the second special symbol display, the second special hold number display, the round display, etc.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first large winning opening sensor 2402, the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 While the contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub out sensor 2403, and the second sub out sensor 3054 are contact type ON / OFF mechanical mechanical It uses a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate unit 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, as the first start opening sensor 3052, the second start opening sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are opened, and the gaming ball B enters frequently. The detection of the game ball B by the first large winning opening sensor 2402 or the second large winning opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is also used for the first large winning opening sensor 2402 and the second large winning opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3051.

  Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out slot 2010, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used as the out port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches whose lifetime is shorter than the proximity switch. Is used.

  In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (gaming information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, etc. To Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the main control MPU will be described later in detail, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control substrate 1310 from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, as described in detail later. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The power failure notice signal is input not only to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, but also to a payout control board 633 or the like.

6-2. Disbursement control board]
The payout control board 633 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B is a payout control unit 633a for performing various control relating to payout and a launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and a launch by which the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145 is performed. Control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, and the ball tank 552, tank rail at the time of maintenance 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the ball extraction switch for discharging the gaming ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper tray 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball extraction operation .

6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 633 is a micro not shown in detail but incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout The apparatus includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball-off detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, or displays a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in serial mode via the payout control I / O port. Or, the number of balls of the gaming ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 633), and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is cut off) Informing that there is no gaming ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B gets caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 and notifies that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, "Count "It is a switch error" (specifically, it is informed that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed "Retry error" (specifically, notification that the number of payout retries has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full" (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the far cover unit 150 indicates that the game ball is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. At the same time, it informs that it is "CR not connected" (in other words, it indicates that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the gaming ball B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. It is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the lent gaming ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining degree to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is the ball lending unit It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

6-2 b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633 b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not illustrated in detail, the emission control unit 633 b is provided with an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for firing the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the above, a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generating a ball-sending reference pulse by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputting the generated pulse to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or finger touches the handle 182, and whether to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball B according to the intention of the player A detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the drive current for shooting the game ball B toward the game area 5a with the launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, the firing reference pulse In response to the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit is a game ball stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side send. Thus, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 190, peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from main control board 1310, and effect display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of

6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although the peripheral control unit 1511 for effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects to which the sound source IC refers are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is selected based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for game board decoration drive board or For transmitting to the drive solenoid or outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button up / down drive motor 367 etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of the side drive data and the lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, the door side light emission data for outputting the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the display control unit serial I / O port In addition to transmission to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Further, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives, from the effect display control unit 1512, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the peripheral display MPU of the effect display control unit 1512 I am monitoring the operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 or the like. Control is performed so that sounds, such as music and sound effects, matched to various effects flow from the speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 or the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4 are acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external In conjunction with the WDT, it diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 km (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is used. k) BPPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, gaming board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5, are different from the display command by a plurality of serial input / output ports. In the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

6-3 b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 performs display control of the effect display device 1600 as well as a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various data. (An abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied Have.

  The display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. I have control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the image ROM in time series when transferring the various data to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance in the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

  The display control MPU extracts the screen data at the top of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the screen data at the top It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts drawing data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not receive screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer method is adopted as VDP. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. Is a method of outputting to

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, as the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as an integrated unit. For example, in the case of displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites will be used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. The sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the position to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relation (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 × 3 Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats main scanning to set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front, and main scanning in the direction intersecting the one direction It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. The effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line As main scanning, when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, the image data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right.

[7. Game content]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hit strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously played in one minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nails N While the flow-down speed of B is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball B, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 to the left of the center role 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it abuts on a plurality of obstacle nails N, The region to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513.

  The game balls B supplied to the stage 2513 roll on the stage 2513 and move back and forth, and are discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central central release portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, so the first probability is high with a high probability. Acceptable at the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. On the main control board 1310, advantageous game states advantageous to the player (eg, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "per probability change (certain variation)", "shortened time") A lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a hit is performed.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center product 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2511, it is brought closer to the center in the lateral direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N. There is a possibility of being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 or the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B inserted into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center character 2500, the guidance of the center character 2500 is given. A plurality of gate paths released through the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 above the gate portion 2003 and implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After coming into contact with the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center work 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose inlet is open near the stopper 1006 and an opening whose left is spaced from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to abut against the stopper 1006 (so-called right-handed), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not abut against the stopper 1006 (right-handed) When the game ball B is hit with a certain level of strength (weaker than that to some extent), it enters the second guide passage 2522 with high probability. That is, the game ball B driven to the right of the upper part of the center product 2500 circulates either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 depending on the driving strength.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with high probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. Further, when the second guide passage 2522 is made to flow more than the first guide passage 2521, the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 pass with high probability.

  When game ball B passes through this gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "normal hit", the first attacker unit The closed second starting port 2004 in 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0) .01 to 60 seconds, commonly referred to as fluctuating time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result can not be started, The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is held until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is finished. Also, the number of pending normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The game ball B passing the left side of the gate unit 2003 and the gate unit 2003 has a high probability that the side right middle unit 2700 with a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate unit 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the left side of the rear right side, and sometimes received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, or rarely received in the second sub-out port 2012. When the game ball B is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out, similarly to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when game ball B is received in second sub-out port 2012, it is discharged out of game area 5a without a chance to be accepted in second large winning opening 2006, second starting opening 2004 or first large winning opening 2005 .

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate unit 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, the second big winning port 2006, the second The game is discharged out of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be accepted by the starting opening 2004 or the first large winning opening 2005.

  As described above, when the gaming ball B is received at the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the gaming ball B is discharged to the outside of the gaming area 5a. It is possible to urge the hitting operation so that the game ball B can not be received in the mouth 2012. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center product 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B in the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. The user can urge the game ball B to hit the second guide passage 2522. In other words, it is possible to urge the striking operation requiring a delicate adjustment for the turning operation of the handle 182 rather than the “right hitting” where the gaming ball B abuts the abutment portion 1006, and the striking operation of the gaming ball B The pachinko machine 1 with its main function can enjoy the original game.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600 After passing through the left side of the center attachment 2500, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side via the lower right guiding passage 2530 of the center article 2500.

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the "small hit" is drawn as the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result, the second large winning combination Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the gaming ball B which has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with high probability in the second big winning opening 2006. When gaming ball B is received at second large winning opening 2006 when second large winning opening 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, ten or more) from payout device 580 by main control substrate 1310 and payout control substrate 633 , 13 game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201.

  The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left of the second large winning opening 2006 left the first shelf 2412a, the second start opening door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b, the top After rolling to the left, it is discharged to the left, and further, the third shelf 2412 c, the first large winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412 d, and the top roll to the left to enter the game area 5a. Released.

  Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second start opening door 2414, the normal lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate section 2003 is "normal hit", and the second start opening door When 2414 is retreated, the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. On the main control board 1310, advantageous game states advantageous to the player (eg, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "per probability change (certain variation)", "shortened time") A lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a hit is performed.

  In addition, when game ball B is rolling on first big winning a prize opening door 2417, the special drawing result which is drawn by the acceptance of game ball B to 1st starting opening 2002 and 2nd starting opening 2004 When the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results (for example, "big hit") that cause the advantageous gaming state, the first big winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the elapse of the special variation time The game ball B can be received. When the game ball B is received in the first large winning opening 2005 when the first large winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) from the payout device 580 by the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633 , 13 game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the first large winning opening 2005 can receive the gaming ball B, many gaming balls B can be paid out by making the first large winning opening 2005 receive the gaming ball B, and the player can be It can be entertaining.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”) advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 A lottery of special lottery results is generated to generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (certain variation)", and "time reduction (short time)", and the special lottery result drawn is Suggests to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 In the special lottery results, there are "lost", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15 R big hit", "per probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction) per", " "Successive time short hit", "Successive time short nona" Per "," the second big hit ", and the like.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the second large winning opening 2006 is in an open state where it can receive the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern to be closed after that is repeated several times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or the first large after the first large winning opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B. When any of the conditions for receiving a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B to the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the open / close pattern (one open / close pattern which makes the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state) The round is called a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, "5R big hit" for 5 rounds, and "15R big hit" for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps") or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "second big hit", after the first large winning opening 2005 has made it possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special (special) state is made as ST (special・ Generate time). This ST is to maintain a definite change or a short time during a predetermined number of predetermined changes.

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 indicate the reception of the game ball B from the start of the special drawing until the special lottery result drawn is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Be put on hold. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row in which each pattern row is fluctuated and variably displayed in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Is sequentially displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows displayed in the stop pattern become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is made. An advantageous gaming state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the finalized image is The time until it is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 in the periphery control board 1510 according to the drawn special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, or the rotation operation can be inhibited. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back unit 3000 for the back unit 3000, back unit Lower left production unit 3200, lower back right production unit 3250, lower back middle production unit 3300, upper back production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the interest for the player's game decreases. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the player control type player operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 on the peripheral control substrate 1510, when the operation to be operated by the player is mistaken or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player of that. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates or the like. The effect display device 1600 displays that effect.

[8. Standing support member]
Subsequently, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the roof plate 8 of the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When installing (attaching) to the vehicle, the pachinko machine 1 assists the independence of the machine to prevent it from tipping over. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foam resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although not shown in detail, a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided on the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounting portion to be mounted to the mounting portion of the pan unit 200. In the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with a groove extending in the front and back direction as a mounting portion, and a protrusion to be inserted into the groove of the plate unit 200 as a mounting portion is provided in the self-supporting auxiliary member 7. ing. Thus, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounting portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility in a state in which the self supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. . Moreover, when removing the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island installation, it can be easily attached by making it slide in the reverse direction to the time of removing the self-supporting auxiliary member 7.

  The mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the tray unit 200 and the mounting portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above, but is performed by "insertion of the projection into the hole", "nail It is also possible to use "locking", "magnetic bonding by magnet", "track fastener", "suction board", "removable adhesive material", or the like. Moreover, as a position which provides the mounting part in the plate unit 200, it does not limit to the lower surface of the above-mentioned plate unit 200, It is good also as "inside", "at least one side", "front" etc. .

  After installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and stored in the game hall side, and when removing the pachinko machine 1 from the island facility Attached to the unit 200 and used. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the plate unit 200 in advance when shipping the pachinko machine 1 from the manufacturer to the gaming hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 has the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 projecting largely to the front. Although it is easy to fall down, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the lower mounting part of the plate unit 200, it is possible to assist the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, between the plate unit 200 and the roof plate 8 of the island facility. Because the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from tipping forward by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 located in the case, when installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed so as not to fall. The pachinko machine 1 is an easy-to-use pachinko machine that does not need to be stored and is easy to install.

  Further, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from falling over, so it is possible to avoid damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to falling over, and the game hall or manufacturer It has become a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the burden on the side.

  Furthermore, since the mounting unit for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 2, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is mounted on the mounting portion of the pan unit 200 to assist the self-standing of the pachinko machine 1 And it is possible to make the rendering device, the decoration member, etc. provided on the door frame 3 larger or to make it project more forward, because A pachinko machine having a large appearance different from that of the pachinko machine can be easily configured, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be provided. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like are largely protruded forward in the door frame 2, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal.

  In the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-rear direction to be detachable from the mounting portion of the pan unit 200. However, the invention is not limited to this. It may be made removable by sliding it in the left and right direction with respect to the plate unit 200 of the frame 3.

  In addition, a functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) provided detachably on the door frame 3 after the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made attachable to and detachable from the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200). The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, and the like may be used in combination. Thereby, when attaching the pachinko machine 1 to an island installation or removing it from an island installation, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 as a self supporting auxiliary member 7 Let 1 be able to stand on its own in a stable condition On the other hand, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, a part of the pachinko machine 1 is attached by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 to the door frame 3 as a functional member. It can function as a functional member to constitute. Specifically, for example, in the case of the door frame left side unit 400 that protrudes forward from the left side of the door window 101 a in the door frame 3 as a functional member that doubles as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 By attaching the frame left side unit 400 to the lower side of the pan unit 200, it can function as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and by detaching from the lower side of the pan unit 200 and attaching it to the left side of the door window 101a, it functions as a functional member be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and it is time-consuming to manage so that the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not lost The burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Alternatively, after making the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 detachable with respect to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), a functional member detachably provided to the main body frame 4 (for example, "substrate cover for covering substrate", "wiring" A wire holding member for holding the game, a protective cover for protecting the rear of the effect display device, the movable decoration, etc., a storage tank for storing game media, a guiding member for circulating game media, etc. It may be used in combination. Thereby, when attaching the pachinko machine 1 to an island installation or removing it from an island installation, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and the pachinko machine 1 is stable. To be able to stand on its own. On the other hand, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the function of configuring a part of the pachinko machine 1 by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4 It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and it is time-consuming to manage so that the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not lost The burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided in the main body frame 4, the player touches the detachable functional member in the state where the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Since it can not be done, it is possible to prevent the player from disengaging the functional members as a result, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

  When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as a functional member. The number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be able to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. Thereby, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to an island facility and make it stand by itself, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is accommodated in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, so that the pachinko machine 1 looks good And the independence supporting member 7 can be prevented from becoming an obstacle to the game. On the other hand, when attaching the pachinko machine 1 to an island installation or removing it from an island installation, take out the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 accommodated in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand alone. Thus, installation and removal of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Also, in this case, there is no need to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 as compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed and stored separately, and it takes time and effort to manage the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 not to be lost The burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having the mounting portion to be attached to the mounting portion of the pan unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this and it is assumed that the mounting portion is not provided. Also good.

  Also, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the pan unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the pan unit 200 (door frame 3) When installing in an island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be made to project downward and be made to abut on the weir plate 8. As a result, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, there is no need to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, and it is possible to reduce the time required for managing the gaming hall side.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 according to the present embodiment are the same as those of the back body 3000 of the back unit 3000 according to the present invention. A back rear right raising / lowering drive motor 3554 of 3554 and the back rear right rendering unit 3600 respectively correspond to the functional components of the present invention.

[10. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the frame of the front component 1000 are closed from the rear side. The back-and-left elevating drive motor 3554 and back-back right as a functional part of the back-back left rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the back side of the game panel 1100 while making the flat-shaped game panel 1100 transparent The rear back right elevating drive motor 3554 of the rendering unit 3600 is disposed so that at least a part is outside the game area 5a in front view, the game panel 1100 and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor At least the portion in the game area 5a of the back and left lift drive motor 3554 and the back back and right lift drive motor 3554 is covered with the 3654. As described above, since the back rear left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5 a are provided, the back rear left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040 are used. It is possible to cover and hide at least a part of the back-rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3554, and pass through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100 and the game area 5a from the player side. The back left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed from deteriorating as well as the back rear lift drive motor 3554 and the back back The pachinko machine 1 all can be viewed by seeing the front back rear back left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040 instead of the right lifting drive motor 365. The appearance can be made better, it is possible to pachinko machine 1 is enhanced appeal against the player.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a divided by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 is hard to understand, so the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not partitioned. It looks like an open feeling, and even if the game area 5a has the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made larger. Therefore, by making the game area 5a look larger than the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1 and to play the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be capable of enhancing the appeal to the player.

  Further, since the decorative body covers at least a portion in the game area in front of the functional parts, the decorative body can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area, so In addition to the above-mentioned effects, the functional parts can be made difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area.

  Furthermore, the back rear left decorative body 3030 and the back rear right decorative body 3040 are made to have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and in front view, the back rear extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a Since the decorations of the left decoration 3030 and the back right decoration 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a hard to recognize, giving an open feeling to the game The size of the area 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back rear left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040, and the pachinko machine 1 It can be made to stand out to make the player more appealing.

  In addition, since the back rear left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040 are opaque, the back rear left rendering unit 3500 and the back rear left rendering unit 3500 provided through the back rear left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040 The back rear right rendering unit 3600 can be prevented from being viewed, and the back rear left rendering unit 3500 and the back rear right rendering unit 3600 can be seen from the player side through the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Can be prevented, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3554 as functional components are arranged outside the game area 5a in front view (in the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554) In order to arrange the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3554 completely (outside the game area 5a), the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a It is possible to arrange the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3554 without increasing the space between the back mount left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3554 It is possible to prevent the space in the game area 5a from being reduced by balancing. In other words, since a part of the back and rear right elevation drive motor 3554 is disposed in the game area 5a in front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is reduced. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made relatively capable of enlarging the space of the game area 5a and further exhibiting the above-described effects. In addition, by providing a part of the driving source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the movable property in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be enlarged, in which case The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is expanded. All the drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the movable items in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

  Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the illumination light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, etc. Can be transmitted, reflected, refracted or diffused, and it can appear as if the front component 1000 or the game panel 1100 is emitting light, and the entire pachinko machine 1 can Can improve the appearance of Moreover, although the opaque decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042 are applied to the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, the base 3031 of each of the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 And since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is made of a transparent member, the light from the various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be the back front left decoration 3030 or the back It can reach the front right decoration 3040 and give the impression that the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 emit light. It can be said that the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are disposed at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can reach.

  In addition, since at least a part of the back raising / lowering drive motor 3554 as a functional part is covered with the back decorative left 3030, it is found that the functional part is a functional part by covering to some extent without covering the whole. It can be painful and look like part of a decoration. Therefore, even if the back rear left decoration 3030 does not have the size to cover the entire back rear left lift drive motor 3554, the same function and effect as described above can be achieved. It is possible to make the game area 5a appear large while reducing the cost for 3030. Although at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3554 is covered and concealed by the back rear left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040, the part is a pachinko machine It is preferable to use a portion close to the center of 1 (a portion closer to the boundary between the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, it also extends from inside of game area 5a to outside of game area 5a with respect to a predetermined place (the place at the lower left in FIG. 131, etc., that is, the place at the lower left corner in game board 5) where there is no drive source outside game area 5a. By providing the decorative body, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear large.

  Further, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 defining the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by the transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back rear left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the back by the back and left decoration 3030 and the back and right decoration 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. Similar effects can be achieved, and the back rear left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smoothed. Can be entertained to control the decline in interest.

  Further, since the back rear left decoration 3030 and the back rear right decoration 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the front view, the back rear left decoration in the door window 101a The back rear left rendering unit 3500 and the rear back right rendering unit 3600 of the rear 3030 and the rear rear right decorative body 3040 can be made invisible and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inner part of the door window 101a in the back rear left lifting drive motor 3354 as a functional part is hidden, the back front left raising body 3030 Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered part can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that the back front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from being unnecessarily long. The cost applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 While being inclined toward the front, in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front has transparency. Because the front decoration of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (to the player) because the decoration is applied (the sticker is pasted), the first starting opening 2002 is made more visible than the general winning opening 2001. Can. Therefore, since the player's awareness can be more easily directed to the first starting opening 2002 than the general winning opening 2001, the number of gaming balls B accepted by the first starting opening 2002 decreases (or, the first starting opening 2002) The player's consciousness concentrates on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the drawing of the first special drawing result performed by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 The player's expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decline in interest, and the position of the first starting opening 2002 to be aimed by the player can be surely recognized, and the player aims the first starting opening 2002. You can enjoy the game.

  When the gaming ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the player can be harassed depending on whether the gaming ball B in the gaming area 5a is received in the first starting opening 2002 or not. The player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the winning (for example, "big hit") that generates an advantageous gaming state is drawn by the drawing of the first special drawing result, and the expectation for the game is enhanced It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. After that, when the winning is drawn by the drawing of the first special drawing result, an advantageous gaming state in which the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern occurs, so the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first start opening 2002 is accepted by the general winning hole 2001, the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed, but the game ball B is paid out as a bonus The player is not discouraged and can continue to enjoy the game to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first start opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Because the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is largely different, a seal is attached to the front of the first starting opening 2002, and a seal is attached to the front of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it does not give a sense of incongruity to the player, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from being deteriorated, and the player enjoys the game with the pachinko machine 1 and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted to the general winning opening 2001 and the first start opening 2002 with certainty, and the user can fully enjoy the pleasure of being accepted. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first start opening 2002 are formed of a transparent member, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the light provided in the pachinko machine 1 Since it becomes possible to reflect, refract and diffuse the light from the means (the LED of the decorative substrate), the general winning hole 2001 and the first starting hole 2002 can be made to look refreshing, and the appearance is good. The appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the accepted gaming ball B is used as a general winning opening. Since the game ball B received in 2001 is later guided backward, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is The game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time because the game ball B can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 where the drawing of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (a feeling of superiority) due to the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 The player can be tasted for a longer time than when the game ball B is accepted to the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first front wall 2203 forming the front of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the gaming ball B accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is immediately The game ball B can be discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 by being guided to the game panel 1100 side), so useless with respect to the game ball B being received in the general winning hole 2001 It is possible to prevent the player from feeling for a long time, to turn the player's attention to the next game ball B, to make the game proceed smoothly and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the general winning hole 2001, after the first front wall 2203 forming the front is inclined to the game panel 1100, a portion of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall 2203. Since it is made possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the gaming ball B overlaps the general winning opening 2001 in front view Also, depending on the player, it can be illusive as if the gaming ball B was received by the general winning hole 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the gaming ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the gaming ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought as an illusion. Since it is possible, it is possible to avoid having a sense of mistrust in the pachinko machine 1 or the gaming hall side even if a benefit (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, and the player can be prevented. It is possible to continue to enjoy the game and to control the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the first front wall 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced and the general winning Decorations such as seals on the front of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Therefore, since the cost for the general winning a prize opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more enjoyable to the player by turning that amount to a rendering device or the like.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back and bottom of the back and forth inside rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the decoration unit 3320 rotates with even number of stop positions (here, six places). While providing a region detection piece 3325 of a length covering half of the stop position and a plurality (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position in the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310, A plurality (here four) of a plurality of (here, three) area specifying sensors 3330 consisting of half the stop position for detecting the area detecting piece 3325 and a single position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting piece 3326 ), So that when the back decoration rotates the rotary ornament 3310, a plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 which detect the area detecting piece 3325. , And then increase and decrease sequentially from one side of the rotation direction, and the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detection piece 3325 makes the current rotational position of the back decoration medium rotating decoration 3310 It is possible to grasp roughly.

  More specifically, in the case of the back-to-back inside-turn decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotational direction, three stop positions where the area detection pieces 3325 are half are arranged. The minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to any stop position is three in number of half of the number of stop positions. And while making three area specific sensors 3330 into the 1st area specific sensor 3330a, the 2nd area specific sensor 3330b, and the 3rd area specific sensor 3330c in a rotation direction, the back decoration middle rotation ornament 3310 is the first stop position It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the area detection piece 3325 at the time of (the position of the decoration number of "3"). From this state, when the rotating decoration body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (position of the decoration number of "2"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. Do. Furthermore, when the rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the third stop position (the position of the decoration number “1”), the first area specifying sensor 3330 a, the second area specifying sensor 3330 b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330 c The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

  Furthermore, when the inner back rotation decoration 3310 is rotated to the fourth stop position (the position of the decoration number “6”), the first area specifying sensor 3330 a is not detected, and the second area specifying sensor 3330 b and the third area specifying The sensor 3330 c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the rotating decorative body 3310 is turned to the fifth stop position (position of the decoration number "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detecting piece. Detect 3325. Then, when the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number “4”), the third area specifying sensor 3330 c is also undetected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are area detecting pieces 3325 Is not detected. Thereafter, when the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 is further rotated, it is rotated to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "3"), and only the first area identification sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325 In the first state, the detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated with the rotation of the rotating decoration 3310 in the lower back.

  As described above, since the area detection pieces 3325 having a length extending to half the number of stop positions of the stop positions are provided, a combination of detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 enables the back decoration to rotate. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 will not be undetected until the back decoration rotates the decorative body 3310 to the next stop position, the back movement is detected. The current position of the middle-turn decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

  And since a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions are provided on the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310, the area detection pieces 3325 of the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 are After roughly detecting the rotation of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by the detection of the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-and-back middle rotary ornament 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by minimizing the shift of the stop position as much as possible.

  In addition, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-to-back rotating ornament 3310, the back-to-back under-turn decorative member 3310 can be accurately stopped at any stop position. It is possible to prevent giving a sense of discomfort (discomfort) to the person, and it is possible to enjoy the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decorative body 3310 in the back down and to suppress the decrease in interest, The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (back and bottom turning ornament 3310) which does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to suppress the shift of the stop position even if the rotational speed of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 is increased. By rotating the lower and middle rotary decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower back and middle rotary decorative body 3310 is made greater than in the case where the lower back and middle lower rotary decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. You can be fast. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the rapidly rotating back and forth inside rotating ornament 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the rotation of the back downward rotating ornament 3310 can be performed. It can be entertained, and a drop in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, by rotating the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 about the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in the forward direction, and it is optional after turning around. Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect of stopping rotation at the stop position of the player, the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the rotation decoration body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the movable effect by the back and forth inside rotating decorative body 3310 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensors 3330) required to detect movement to any stop position. And the number of stop positions of the back-to-back rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (the grasp of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (the area specifying sensor 3330 and the position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. The player can be entertained by the back-to-back rotating ornament 3310 having more stop positions, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It is a gaming machine (parrot machine) formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, although the thing with six stop positions was shown as a back decoration in a back unit 3000 of the back unit 3000, and the rotation decoration body 3310 in the back generation middle, it does not limit to this, It may have four to ten stop positions.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, although what was rotated as a movable body (back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310) which has several stop positions was shown, it is not limited to this, The movable body which has several stop positions For example, it is also possible to set “around”, “move linearly”, “move circularly”, “move curved”, or the like.

1 pachinko machine 3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a game area 100 door frame base unit 101 door frame base 101a door window 160 glass unit 1000 front component 1100 game panel 1110 panel board 1120 panel holder 3000 back unit 3010 back box 3030 Back front left decoration (decoration)
3040 Back front right decoration (decoration)
Back Back Left Production Unit 3550 Back Back Left Drive Unit 3554 Back Back Left Lift Motor (Functional Parts)
3600 back right production unit 3650 back right drive unit 3554 back right drive motor (functional parts)

Claims (1)

A transparent frame-shaped front component defining the outer periphery of the game area;
A gaming machine comprising: a decorative body provided on the rear side of the front component and extending from inside the gaming area to outside the gaming area in a front view.

Images